Home

"user manual"

1. NT31 NT31C Unit Board te a a ee er R o r J SYSMAC o o i CS Cu series PLC BL C series PLC S 88808 CVM1 CV series A q e H PLC SRM1 25 pin connector Serial port B RS 422A 25 pin type 9 pin connector or 25 pin connector RS 422A cable with connectors max length 500m Connecting an NT31 NT31C and Host RS 422A NT31 NT31C Host tt Wiring When Connecting a C series Host Link Unit or CPM1 Host Link Applicable Units C200H LK202 V 1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C500 LK203 3G2A6 LK202 EV 1 116 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 oooo0oo0oo0o000000 OOOO o0o0o000Q NT31 NT31C side onnector G 1 a 3 ee eae i RS 232C 422A 485 connector PLC side EN omm connector Cepe Cale Carei 25 RDA 16 DAEN 25 pin type For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 Wiring When Connecting CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C or SRM1 Applicable Units CPM1 10CDR L1 CPM1 20CDR L CPM1A 10CDL L CPM1A 20CDL1 _ CPM1A 30CDL _1 CPM1A 40CDL 1 1 CPM2A 30CDLILI L1 CPM2A 40CDL IL 1 CPM2A 60CDL IL 1 CPM2C 10ULUUULU L CPM2C 20 ULUL SRM1 C02 V2 Conne
2. 7 mm max 7 mm max Recommended Terminals Type Type Applicable Wire fork type round type stranded wire Japan Solderless Terminal MFG 2 YS3A 2 0 to 2 63 mm2 Fuji Terminal 2 YAS3 5 V2 S3 5 Nichifu Terminal 2Y 3 5 2 3 5 Conformance to Shipbuilding Standard e Use gaskets or other materials to completely shield all openings and other gaps in the control panel e Use copper tape or other electrically conductive tape to shield gaps between the cutout and the PT before securing the PT in place e To suppress noise terminal voltage perform installation under the follow ing conditions It is recommended to use the following product for the DC power supply Recommended Power Supply model S82K 03024 Manufacturer OMRON The NT31 NT31C has a functional ground terminal Carry out wiring under the following conditions 1 In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the NT31 NT31C and the host ground as shown in the following figure If there is some distance between the NT31 NT31C and host and grounding at a single point is difficult do not connect the functional ground terminal 4 of the NT31 NT31C 2 If the NT31 NT31C is installed in the same panel as equipment that gen erates noise such as a motor or inverter do not ground the functional ground terminal 4 of the NT31 NT31C a Grounding at a single point Carry out grounding c
3. The NT31 NT31C can be connected to the host by a host link or NT link and receive necessary data from the host Data input using the touch panel switch ON OFF statuses numeric values character strings can be transmitted to the host ON OFF information numeric data etc The screen data to be displayed on the NT31 NT31C can be created on a per sonal computer using the Support Tool Connect the NT31 NT31C to the per sonal computer with an RS 232C cable and transmit the screen data to the NT31 NT31C Create screen data RS 232C ae Screen data Personal computer Support Tool When the host is connected at serial port A the personal computer is only connected when communicating screen data between the NT31 NT31C and Support Tool Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 1 2 Functions of the NT31 NT31C The NT31 NT31C has the following features 1 2 1 Features Downsized Body e Slim body 50 mm or less in the panel e The communications cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not protrude from the unit When mounted in a panel of the recommended thickness page 30 Construction Best Suited e The panel is an STN monochrome LCD type with backlight for the NT31 to the FA Environment and an STN color LCD type with backlight for the NT31C e The backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the operation site e Protection e
4. 422A 485 connector RS 422A connector 9 pin type 25 pin type For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 5 2 4 1 N Connection among RS 422A Ports Reference The connection method in which the RS 422A ports of multiple NT31 NT31Cs and one host are connected in a 1 N connection is described here CPU Unit NT31 NT31C aja lO a O CS CuJ series C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H PLC Serial port B RS 422A 25 pin type JJ _ 9 pin connector 25 pin connector RS 422A cables max total length 500 m e Communications using the RS 422A standard NT link 1 N method is possible only when a Serial Communications Board CS Series only or Serial Communications Unit is installed in a CS CJ series PLC a Com munications Board is installed in a C200HX HG HE Z E or a CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a CQM1H 121 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 e Communications using the RS 422A high speed NT link 1 N method is possible only when a Serial Communications Board CS Series only or Serial Communications Uni
5. Mode selector Host Local e Mode selector key switch Set this to Host link Setting the Rear Switches e O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A I O port L_ AS 422A RS 232C ae e Unit DIP SW1 Synchronization a Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Internal External A e Synchronization selector switch Terminator Cm Set this to Internal OFF m ON Oe e Communications speed CTS CH DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 m i Edere OE Set these switches to 0010 to select a 19200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled e CTS selection selector switch Set this always to 0 V ON e Terminator setting Selector switch Set this switch to ON 99 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 C1000H C2000H Rack mounting Unit C500 LK203 Setting the Rear Switches e I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A 5 V supply ON OFF an I O port i Bu e Unit parity and transfer code RS 422A DIP SW1 1 to SW1 7 RS 232C ao Set SW1 1 to SW1 7 to OFF 0 Synchronization Internal EA Extemal e Synchronization selector switch t this to Int l a aun tonmiema OFF Zz ON 6 e Communic
6. OOo0c00 e Communications type setting DIP SW3 Set this switch to ON for communications by NT link I O port selector switch RS 232C I RS 422A e Terminator setting DIP SW6 Set this switch to ON Set terminator ON Connecting to a C series C200HX HG HE Z E or CQM1H PLC Setup Area Settings Write the PLC Setup area data memory settings directly from a Program ming Device e g CX Programmer in accordance with the host model Host Model Word Setting Setting Contents Port A of C200HX HG HE Z E DM6555 4000 Use NT link 1 1 D Port 2 of CQM1H 7 M6550 4000 1 RS 422A port of the Communications Board 2 RS 422A port of the Serial Communications Board For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area refer to the manual for the PLC you are using Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board Set the switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board as fol lows Switch 1 4 wire RS 422A Switch 2 ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Using the NT Link 1 N Method Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Serial Communications Board
7. 1 14 NT31 NT31C side Abbreviatio Connecor Shielding wire D 010 O 2 s jii 6 2 co ofe E RS 232C EN s c O Paa Ce O O 6 O 6 M NT AL001 side Oo 9 TN O Oo e 13 25 25 pin type Next PT For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 88 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connection between NT31 NT31C Units RS 422A NT31 NT31C NT AL001 Host RS 422A 1 NT31 NT31C side NT31 NT31C side Shielding wire RS 232C 422A 485 connector 422A 485 connector oooo0oo0oo0000000 DPOOOO000000GD N 13 25 25 pin type 25 pin type The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay ter minal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below OO000000000 0 OOOWOOOO0O00GQ N 13 25 2 Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31 NT31C marked x in the figure above only For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 89 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connection between The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay ter A i Units RS minal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indi
8. C200HG CPU53 Z E4 C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E 4 C200HX Z E C200HX CPU44 Z E4 C200HX CPU54 Z E4 C200HX CPU64 Z E4 C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE TA CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board or CS1W SCU31 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required 2 This CPU Unit is for a Duplex CPU Unit System The CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board cannot be used Use the CS1W SCU31 V1 Serial Communications Unit 3 A CS1W SCU31 V1 or CS1W SCU41 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required 4 A C200HW COM03 V1 or C200 COM06 V1 Communications Board is required gt A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required Settings at the Host C series C200HX HG HE Z E and CQM1H PLC Setup Area Settings Write the communications conditions directly into the PLC Setup area data memory using a Programming Device e g CX Programmer Make the setting indicated in the word shown below Connection to Word Writing Value seting Port A ofa Peal DM6555 500 Use NT link 1 N HG HE Z LI The highest unit number of Port 2 ofa CQM1H 2 DM6550 5000 the connected PTs 0 to 7 1 The Communications Board s RS 422A 485 port 2 The Serial Communications Board s RS 422A 485 port 3 When using C200HE Z E the maximum PT unit number is 3 For details on setting the PLC Setup area settings refer to the PLC s opera tion manual e There are no Serial Communications Boar
9. Section 3 5 If the combination is not as listed above a data transmitting error occurs e When writing the system program into the NT31 NT31C the type of sys tem program inside Memory Unit and the type of PT must correspond 2 Switch the NT31 NT31C power ON The screen data is automatically written into the PT The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing At the same time the progress of data writing status is displayed by the means of the number of bytes and blocks 1 bank 16 block 1024k byte The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status Preparing flashes at intervals of 1 second Transmitting flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Verifying flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Finished lights up Switch the NT31 NT31C power OFF remove the Memory Unit To operate NT31 NT31C continuously switch the NT31 NT31C power back ON In this method the direction of transmission and area of the Memory Unit used are set by touch switch operations at the NT31 NT31C Transmission can be executed while checking the settings When data is written to the NT31 NT31C or Memory Unit the data that has been stored up until that point is lost Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission 1 Check that the NT31 NT31C power is OFF then set the DIP switches on
10. SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU wit PT Settings Memory Init Display Hisory temory Switch Alarm History screen Data Disp Select Memory Init Calendar Check 1 0 Check Select Recipe Table Select Yes The recipe tables are initialized During initialization the message Initializing is displayed If No is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the recipe tables On completion of memory table initialization the message Finished is dis played and the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 146 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables Reference It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string memory tables in the NT31 NT31C When these tables are initialized the values are returned to those set by the Support Tool they are not cleared When the memory tables are initialized they are returned to their initial values regardless of the setting made for the resume function page 182 If ON is set for the Resume Function memory switch the initial values set with the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are ini tialized e If OFF is set for the Resume Function memory switch the memory tables can be initialized just by switching the NT31 NT31C power off and back on again or by resetting the NT31 N
11. D Device check 205 Device Monitor function 225 Dimensions 247 Direct connection function 16 Disabling enabling System Menu display 153 Disabling enabling writing to the screen data memory 153 Display 27 Display color 248 289 290 Index Display device 248 Display specifications 248 Displaying and printing the display history record 198 Displaying setting the calendar and clock 195 Downloading the system program 152 E Effective display area 248 Enclosure ratings 247 Error messages 235 Errors in the system installer mode and their remedies 238 Errors occurring at start of operation 235 Errors occurring during operation 237 Errors occurring on screen data initialization and transmis sion 237 Errors when using a memory unit 43 Expansion interface connector 28 Expansion Mode 136 External interface specifications 249 F Functional ground terminal 32 G General specifications 247 GR terminal 28 Grounding 32 247 H Host link 17 Host link method 46 96 Host link unit 47 279 I O settings 191 In the panel 4 Initializing alarm history record data 144 Initializing display history record data 142 Initializing the memory switches 149 Initializing the memory tables 147 Initializing the recipe tables 146 Inspection method 245 Installation environment 30 Installation in the operation panel 30 L Life expectancy backlight 248 Life expecta
12. C200HX CPU34 C200HX CPU44 Z Z C200HX CPU54 Z C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections CS series CS1 H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 9 pin CS1G H D CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 Features a connector for RS 232C connections CJ series CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H 9 pin CJ1G H M CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CV500 CPU01 EV1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections CVM1 CV series CV1000 CPU01 EV1 selectable 9 pin CV500 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series EC EC EC selectable 9 pin C200HX Z E E E CV1000 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CV2000 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CYNI CVM1 CPU21 EV2 Either of the Communications Boards C200HW COM02 COM04 COM05 COMO6 EV1 is required 280 Model List Appendix J CPU Units for Connection via a 1 1 NT Link Model Specification SPC Type CPM1 10CDR RS 232C adapter connected to the peripheral port C series RS 422A adapter cannot be used CPM1 CPM1A 40CD CPM2A 30CDLILI L Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CPM2A 40CDLILI L CPM2A CPM2A 60CDLILI L CPM2C 10UIUILILILILI L I Connect to the RS 232C port of a CPM2C CN111 Con C series CPM2C 20 L necting Cable CPM2C
13. CQM1 CPU41 EV1 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1 CPU45 EV1 CQM1H CPU21 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CQM1H CPU61 C200HS CPU21 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections select C series C200HS CPU23 E able 9 pin C200HS C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 Z E Features a connector for RS 232C connections select C series C200HE CPU42 Z E able 9 pin C200HE Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E Features a connector for RS 232C connections select C series C200HG CPU43 Z E able 9 pin C200HG Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E Features a connector for RS 232C connections select C series C200HX CPU44 Z E able 9 pin C200HX Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E NN S NO NO N A NN AN NN m C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CV500 CPU01 EV1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections select CVM1 CV series CV1000 CPU01 EV1 able 9 pin CV500 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CV2000 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 Either of the Communications Boards C2O0OHW COM02 COM04 COM05 COMO6 EV1 is required 281 Model List Appendix J CPU Units for Connection via a 1 N NT Link Model Specification PLCType _ CQM1H CPU51 1 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1H CPU61 CQM1H C200HE CPU
14. In the following sections the term NT Link is used to refer to the NT Link com munications method in general the term 1 1 NT Link is used to refer specifi cally to NT Links with a 1 1 connection and the term 1 N NT Link is used to refer to both standard and high speed NT Links with 1 N connections When necessary the standard 1 N NT Link is distinguished from the high speed 1 N NT Link The NT link has the following features e High speed communications with specific types of PLCs can be executed The NT31 NT31C also supports OMRON s high speed 1 N NT Link e Writing in units of bits to the PLC memory area is possible This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been al located to be allocated for other purposes e g a lamp However since data is written to the DM area in word units the other bits of words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other purposes The NT link can be used even when the PLC is in the RUN mode When the host link method is used the NT31 NT31C switches to the monitor mode when the PLC is in the RUN mode In the case of PTs that support the standard 1 N NT Link NT20S NT31 NT31C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C up to 8 PTs can be connected to one port of the PLC and used at the same time Up to 8 PTs NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C can also be connected simultaneously when the high speed 1 N NT Link is being used All of the PTs connect
15. J82 monochrome When using a monochrome printer with an NT31C set Tone printing with the NT31C memory switches page 175 3 4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader 34 Note Connecting a bar code reader to the NT31 NT31C enables bar code data to read as character strings into character string input fields and set in character string memory tables In order to use a bar code reader the Comm A Method memory switch must be set to Bar Code Reader For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code reader refer to 3 7 Input of Numeric Values and Character Strings in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual Make sure that the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply to the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable Connecting a Bar Code Reader Section 3 4 3 4 1 Connection Method Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT31 NT31C as shown in the figure below Bar code reader Serial port A RS 232C 9 pin Connector cable Bar code reader cable Bar code reader must match the communications setting 3 4 2 Setting a Bar Code Reader page 35 and data format 3 4 3 Data Format page 36 in order to connect to the NT31 NT31C Please confirm the specification of the bar code reader before using For details on making a connector cable refer to Appendix G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader Reference T
16. PT in text and changed model numbers in graphic Page 246 Changed and added information in table on power supply voltage and backlight brightness Pages 247 and 248 Changed specifications tables to add information on new mod els Pages 275 276 and 277 Added new models Page 281 Removed information on SJ cables with connectors Page 283 Changed PT models that support replaceable backlights 293 Revision History Revision code Dae Revised content September 2007 New models added descriptions added and errors corrected 05 October 2010 The following revisions were made accompanying a change in the display device Pages 248 and 292 Deleted information on the view angle 294 Authorized Distributor
17. Set the mode setting switch to HOST upper position CS CJ series CPU Unit CS1G H CPULILI E V1 CS1G H D CPULIJLIH E CJ1G M CPULILJ CJ1G H CPULILJH Connect to the built in RS 232C port of the CPU Unit or the RS 232C port of the Communications Board Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be made via an RS 232C Adapter CS1W CN118 specially designed for connecting to a peripheral port PLC Setup When connecting to a CS CJ series CPU Unit set the following communica tions conditions for the PLC Setup area Since the settings shown below are the PLC default settings for the CPU Unit no change to the PLC Setup is nec essary as long as the communications speed is maintained at 9600 bps item Setting at Host Communications speed Set the same speed as set at the NT31 NT31C 1 Stop bits 2 stop bits Data length ASCII 7 bits Unit No for the host link 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method page 161 When the communications speed is set to 19200 bps the PLC Setup of the CPU Unit need to be changed Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Peripheral port This is used mainly for connection to the Programming Device This also supports the RS 232C unit connection RS 232 port This is used mainly for connection to the RS Either set the PLC Setup directly fro
18. e ON When a communications error occurs the NT31 NT31C automatically returns to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen the System Initializing screen may be displayed e OFF When a communications error occurs an error screen is displayed and operation stops Pressing OK on the error screen returns the NT31 NT31C to the RUN mode The default factory setting is OFF Reference e f a communications error occurs when OFF is set for Comm Auto return the NT31 NT31C makes the number of attempts at communications with the host specified by the setting for the Retry Counts touch switch page 187 If communications cannot be re established in any of these attempts an error screen is displayed e For details on communications errors refer to 7 2 5 Communications Errors and Their Remedies page 239 184 System Settings Section 6 9 Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode E MENU Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings fcreen Data Diep Calendar Check 1 Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the third memory switch setting screen Select Memory Switch Start up Wait Time asec Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF ESC P er Controller Print Method Tone e pns 2 Pa aa serino ai Com
19. 1 port 279 Model List Appendix J CPU Units for Connection via a Host Link Model Specification PLC Type CPM1 10CDR RS 232C adapter RS 422A adapter connected C series to the peripheral port CPM1 CPM1A 40CDL CPM2A 30CDLILI L Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C con C series CPM2A 40CDLIL1 nections CPM2A CPM2A aaa The PLC s communications connector canbe C series split into an RS 232C port and peripheral port CPM2C with a CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable The CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cables convert the connector to a single RS 232C or peripheral port CQM1 CPU21 E Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C con C series CQM1 CPU41 EV1 nections CQM1 CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1 CPU45 EV1 CQM1H CPU11 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C con C series CQM1H CPU21 nections CQM1H CQM1H CPU51 The CQM1H CPU11 E has only a peripheral CQM1H CPU61 port C200HS CPU21 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HS CPU23 E selectable 9 pin C200HS C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 Z Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HE CPU42 Z selectable 9 pin C200HE Z E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series selectable 9 pin C200HG Z E E C200HG CPU33 Z C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z C200HG CPU63 Z E E E
20. 11 Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 Numeral Displays String Displays Numeral Inputs String Inputs 12 The following 8 types of display graphic can be used for touch switches Stan dard shadow 3 dimension no display frame rectangle circle polygon sec tor When rectangle circle polygon or sector is selected as the shape the area within which pressing of the touch switch is sensed the touch switch area can be set independently of the position where the display graphic is set When this Touch position is switch area pressed Display frame Function executed There are four touch switch labels fixed display character strings ON OFF switching character strings numeral displays and character string displays When fixed display character strings or ON OFF switching character strings are used several lines of labels can be displayed Numeric values stored in the numeral memory tables are displayed The dis played numerals can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral memory tables Hexadecimal values can also be displayed When decimal values are displayed the number of digits for the integral part and fractional part of displayed values can be specified in advance Character strings stored in the character string memory tables are displayed The displayed character strings can be changed by changing the data stored in the character string memory ta
21. 33 Connecting a Printer Section 3 3 3 3 Connecting a Printer 3 3 1 Reference Connecting a printer to the NT31 NT31C enables printing of hard copies of the currently displayed screen printing of screen images and by system menu operations printing of the screen display history and alarm history The following types of data can be printed depending on the printer con nected to the NT31 NT31C For details refer to the pages cited e Hard copies of the screen Refer to information on printing data and checking the printer status in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Program mable Terminal Reference Manual e Screen display history record data page 198 e Alarm history record data page 200 Connection Method Connect the printer to the NT31 NT31C with a Centronics cable as shown below The length of the cable should not exceed 1 5 m If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the printer is on the NT381 NT31C may malfunction Always turn off the power to the printer before connecting or disconnecting the cable Recommended Connector Cable The following connection cables are recommended e NTI CNT121 1 5 m 20 pin to 36 pin made by OMRON Recommended Printers When using a printer use one that can emulate an NEC PC PR201H us ing the NEC PC PR201PL control protocol or complies with one of the fol lowing EPSON control standards ESC P 24 J83C color or ESC P 24
22. Inner Board slot 1 Terminator Switch TERM Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE Set to 4 right side Compatible Host Units The only OMRON PLCs that can be connected using the RS 422A 485 NT link 1 N method are the CS CJ series PLCs and the C series C200HX HG HE Z E and CQM1H PLCs A Serial Communications Board Unit must be installed to make the connection Check the model and series of the PLC against the model of CPU Unit or Communications Board before making the connections The Units that can be connected to the RS 232C port of the NT31 NT31C by the RS 422A type NT link 1 N function via a convertor are indicated in the table below PLC CPU Units with Built CPU Unit that becomes Model Name Series In NT Link 1 N connectable by installing a Function Communications Board Unit CS CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 CS1G series E v1 01 CS1H CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 CS1D E v1 01 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ CJ1G CPU44 45 3 series CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H 9 CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 9 109 110 Reference Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 CPU Units with Built CPU Unit that becomes Model Name in NT Link 1 N connectable by installing a Function Communications Board Unit ects C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HE C200HE CPU42 Z E4 C200HG CPU33 Z E 4 C200HG C200HG CPU43 Z E4
23. LED creck Battery Battery e The check screen displays all the dots on the screen either press any where on the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be cleared With the NT31C the display and clearance of all the dots on the screen is repeated for each color in turn red green blue magenta cyan yellow white black On completion of the display and clearance of all dots the NT31 NT31C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen e Touch the touch panel to discontinue the LCD check Even if 3 seconds have not passed the check will proceed to the next color 208 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Checking the Backlight Check if the backlight functions normally by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode TENANCE MODE MENU Select I O Check Select Device Check I F Check Device Check Select Backlight Check wit Screen menory screen Memory Buzzer Check Touch Switch Touch Switch LED creck Battery Battery e If the backlight is normal it flashes At this time the Backlight Check touch switch is displayed in reverse video e To end the backlight check press the Backlight Check touch switch again Screen Data Memory Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally Check Reference e In the screen data memory check a write test is performed on the screen data memory Since all the screen data in the NT31 NT31C is l
24. Middle 7 and Low touch switches in the left half of the screen The contrast is set and the NT31 NT31C returns to the I O SETTINGS MENU screen System Maintenance Section 6 11 Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen function or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST ADJUST Adjust the brightness with the touch EPONE aes switches High Middle Low in the left half l of the screen ES Middle Low 3RIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST ADJUST Press Quit Brightness Contrast The brightness is set and the NT31 NT31C returns to the previous screen Low 6 11 2 Displaying Setting the Calendar and Clock Reference The NT31 NT31C has a clock function for setting and displaying the date and time This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu opera tion from the System Menu e The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week settings When setting the clock data be sure to set the correct date and day of the week If a mistake is made for example entering a value in the range 13 to 19 when entering the month the buzzer sounds three times Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes e Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function Clock data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT31 NT3
25. N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage N WARNING Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied Doing either of ON these may result in electrical shock AN WARNING Switch OFF the NT31 NT31C power before replacing the backlight Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock CAUTION Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF the power supply Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high temperatures xvii Safety Precautions xviii SECTION 1 General This section provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs types of connection communications methods etc This information will enable you to understand the applications of the PTs 1 1 Role and Operation of the NT31I NT31C 0 0 000020 e 2 1 1 1 Operation of an NT31 NT31C at an FA Production Site 2 1 1 2 Operations of the NT31 NT31C ve rs wee a ws exe Shade Seen 3 12 Foncions of HENT UNT ICO n 22 patos gee eee a kaha pave dee Baas oe 4 2l FEAE S perii ai e a A ae a dE eS 4 1 2 2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31IC 6 1 2 3 Comparison between NT30 NT30C and NT31 NT31C fi 1 2 4 Principal Functions of NT31I NT31C 002 8 8 E25 Dipy Sst ott Dates Cosa Gee Cote eae wane ewes 10 ls System
26. NT31C Only 175 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement 000 0c ee eee 176 131 132 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 9 8 Setting the Screen Saver Start up Time 0045 6 9 9 Setting the History Display Method 000005 6 9 10 Setting the Resume Function 0 0 00 e eee eee 6 9 11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function 000008 6 9 12 Setting the Time out Interval 0 0 0 0 eee eee 6 9 1353 Setting the Reny Count svat ena eae exe we ake Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function 0 00000 aee System Mantena NCE s fone a ela ee Ga Rah ee Re hoa aeare As Gallet TOSENN 43 c4t eb norrena e chee Gener hee eee ey 6 11 2 Displaying Setting the Calendar and Clock 6 11 3 Checking the PT Setting Status 0 0 0 0 cea 6 11 4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record 6 11 5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record 6 Li 6 Checking Screen Data cc cick co bh 4 nce ism san psbA at see one etc ene shm weeded Galley Dovie CHC OK pirar kinne tbat aladetete nan spied eine hau wee x 6 11 28 Checkin Intenaces c c da d ada wea had g 2 RG Re eee Aas Programming Console Function ai 404444 260045044 ei wkdeo eset oie Gale sable Syste Snecer taht Gd ah alate a AGE Rah aaa a eS 612 2 Connection Methods rrei ean aE Sees Seana eee 6 2 3 Method of US cp eet
27. Note NT System Installer version 2 0 or higher is required to install the NT31 31C V3 system program NT System Installer version 2 0 is provided with NT series Support Tool version 4 08 or higher These system programs are mutually compatible therefore they can be installed and used for the NT31 ST121L E NT31C ST141L E NT31 ST121L EV1 NT31C ST141LJ EV1 NT31 ST121L EV2 NT31 1122 EV2 NT31C ST141LJ EV2 and NT31C ST142 _ EV2 However there will restrictions in some functions depending on the combination Refer to the following table System program version 4 0L can be used only with the NT31 ST123L EV3 or NT31C ST143L EV3 This system program cannot be installed on pre version 2 hardware System programs earlier than version 3 1L cannot be installed in the NT31 ST123L EV3 or NT31C ST143LI EV3 The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool refer to NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 L Operation Manual V061 E1 L Limitations of System Program PT Combinations The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool refer to NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 Operation Manual V061 E1 L 275 Relationship between System Program and Hardware Appendi
28. SW1 3 Manual transmission Direction of transmission Ce Not executed and bank used el at the PT touch panel ON Executed SW1 4 Data type to transfer OFF Screen data ON System program ON System program program e SW2 SWe2 1 Disable enable writing to PT OFF Disable ON Enable SW2 2 Disable enable writing to the Memory Unit OFF Disable ON Enable SWe2 3 Area bank selection of automatic transmission OFF Bank 0 ON Bank 1 SWe2 4 System Screen simultaneous transmission OFF Disable ON Enable Enable 38 Using a Memory Unit Reference Writing Screen Data to a Memory Unit Using Automatic Transmission PT to Memory Unit Reference 1 2 3 Reference Section 3 5 The Memory Unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each of areas bank 0 bank 1 The total data storage is for two PTs SW2 3 sets which of these two banks is used for automatic transmission e In the following cases a mode setting error occurs e More than one of the SW1 1 to SW1 3 switches are set to ON e None of the SW1 1 to SW1 3 switches are set to ON e In the following case a protect setting error occurs Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2 1 or SW2 2 e In the following cases a data transmission error occurs e An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to PT system program area e An attempt is made to transmit the
29. The contrast is set and the NT31 NT31C returns to the I O SETTINGS MENU screen Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen function or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area 192 System Maintenance Section 6 11 3RIGHINESS AND CONTRAST ADJUST A dju st the contrast with the touch switches EEEN nini in the right half of the screen 2 Increase 10 steps A Increase 1 step V Decrease 1 step Decrease 10 steps Low BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST ADJUST Press Quit Brightness NE The contrast is set and the NT31 NT31C returns to the previous screen Middle Low Backlight Brightness The NT31 NT31C allows the brightness of the backlight to be adjusted in 3 Adjustment steps The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjust ment while actually checking the brightness on the screen 193 System Maintenance 194 Section 6 11 Setting from the System Menu Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Screen Data Diep Calendar Check Select I O Settings Select Brightness Adjust Contrast Ad just Brightness Ad jus bui Adjust the contrast with the High
30. ar aeT screen to display the third memory switch Wait Time sec setting screen Select Memory Switch Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF Controller ESC P Print Method Tone lt MEMORY SWITCH gt OM OFF Comm Auto return 2 lt noe D 72 2 Set a number of times in the input field to the right of Retry Counts Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated and keys ime out Intervall flsec Retry Courts To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Section 6 10 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function The NT31 NT31C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar code reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings into character string input fields This section describes the communications conditions for the bar code reader and the setting met
31. here This is a 9 pin connector for RS 232C use only Serial port B connector Connect the cable for connection to the host here Depending on the setting made at the NT31 NT31C system menu either RS 232C or RS 422A 485 may be used This is a 25 pin connector It is not possible to use RS 232C and RS 422A 485 at the same time Printer connector Connect the printer cable here Output conforms to Centronics specifications Note Confirm system safety before turning the power ON OFF or resetting 28 SECTION 3 Hardware Settings and Connections This section describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices For details on connecting to the host refer SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port E JInStaWlauon 440 asta Mie wer ok ety distr ed dala adele bee eed aes 30 3 1 1 Installation Environment 0 0 0 0 30 3 1 2 Installation in the Operation Panel 000055 30 3 1 3 Power Supply Connection 0 0 0 cece eee 31 S2le4 GROUNCING ox vance yan e Oak areer Gk MERE eee PEs BoE ee ees 32 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool 0 0 cee 33 Joe ACONNGCHNS aA PHMNCi 5 4 0 surcaie aor at tea h hahah Ga aaa ewes 34 S232 Connection Memoli ertrar nee ee eset ee eee eee ns 34 3 4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader 2220 2 4 Ncrnsn eagle cata atia tadi 34 3 4 1 Connection Meth
32. or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 11 System Maintenance The NT31 NT31C has the following maintenance and check functions po tem PT Fretion Page I O Settings Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight Calendar Check Display and setting of the time data of the NT31 NT31C clock function PT Settings Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT31 NT31C and display of the 197 setting statuses of the serial ports 198 202 VO Checking of the I O functions of the NT31 NT31C 205 Checking of the communications functions of the NT31 NT31C This section describes how to use these functions 6 11 1 I O Settings This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the bright ness of the backlight With the NT31 31C you can adjust the contrast and brightness settings using either of the following two methods Setting from the System Menu Adjusting the contrast Select System Menu Maintenance Mode I O Settings Contrast Adjust Adjusting
33. or full circle shape the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range 100 to 100 of the preset value Users can choose from moving pointer type and filling area type displays Users can also add graduation to the graph 60 Broken Line Graphs Broken line graphs display in an easy to read form a sequence of numeral memory table values converted to a percentage within the range 100 to 100 of a preset value 100 0 me V Example showing a series of 11 numeral memory table values with a check mark set for the display sign 100 pate Trend Graphs Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory table converting the value to a percentage within the range 100 to 100 of a preset value The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time Past data can also be recorded and the numeral memory table can be read sampled even while the trend graph is not being displayed The user can choose to stop sampling restart sampling or display past data by pressing touch switches 13 Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 Alarm List History Recipe 14 The alarm list history function displays messages in list form or graphics image library data in accordance with changes in bit memory table sta tuses For the alarm list a series of bit memory tables are monitored
34. system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Xii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbe
35. temory Switch Alarm History 1 0 Settings Screen Data Disp Calendar Check 170 Check Select Memory Init Select Memory Switch Select Yes The memory tables are initialized During initialization the message Initializing is displayed If No is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the memory switches On completion of memory switch initialization the message Finished is dis played and the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 149 Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 After initialization the memory switch statuses are as follows Memory Swin seso SatupwatTime oo ooo Comm A Method Host Link communications speed 9600 bps Comm B Select RS 232C Comm B Method The communications conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as fol lows Data bits 7 bits stop bit 1 bit parity none flow control RS CS 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode 150 The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode e Setting the display language see below e Clearing installing the system program page 151 e Disabling enabling display of the System Menu changing the system set tings page 153 e Disabling enabling writing to the screen data memory changing the sys tem settings page 153 e Clearing screen data page 154 For details on calling the System Installer mode refer to Calling
36. 0 0 0 0000 eee 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 5 5 2 6 5 2 7 5 2 8 Host Types and Setting S cersesc srseerrsra ee rarr i ainu pais Direct Connection between RS 422A Ports at Both Units Direct Connection between RS 485 Ports at Both Units 1 N Connection among RS 422A Ports 0 000000 aes 1 N Connection among RS 485 Ports 0 0 0 0 0c eae Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables SECTION 5 80 81 82 86 92 93 94 95 116 119 121 124 126 127 128 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port 79 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 5 1 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port The methods for connecting the RS 422A 485 port of the NT31 NT31C and the RS 232C port of the host are described here There are the following methods The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PLCs By using the memory link method a connection can be made to any arbitrary RS 232 unit When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PLCs refer to the PLC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual VO60 E1 L e Method in which the RS 422A port of the NT31 NT31C and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 1 connection via an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter page 82 When this met
37. 214 Checking screen data 202 Checking the backlight 209 Checking the battery voltage 213 Checking the buzzer 206 Checking the LCD screen display 208 Checking the PT setting status 197 Checking the RUN LED 207 Checking touch switches 211 Chemical resistant cover 286 Cleaning method 245 Clearing screen data 140 154 Clearing installing the system program 151 Comm A Method 159 Comm B Method 159 Comm B Select 159 Communications Board 47 61 65 70 96 Communications Boards 107 Communications by Using Memory Link 19 Communications condition 159 Communications condition settings for bar code readers 189 Communications condition settings for the host link method 159 Communications errors and their remedies 239 Communications method for communications with the host 158 Communications method settings 160 Communications methods 24 Communications port 24 Communications specifications 251 Communications type 24 Communications Unit 279 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C 6 Connecting a bar code reader 34 Connecting a printer 34 Connecting directly between RS 232C ports 73 Connecting to other model PLCs 19 Connecting to the Support Tool 33 Connection cable 284 Connection method 24 Contrast adjustment 191 CPU Unit 96 CPU Units 61 65 70 107 109 CPU Units for connection via a host link 280 CPU Units connectable with Host Link Units or Communi cations Board 96
38. 40CDL 0 CPM2C 20L JILL I L CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU61 C200HS CPU21 E EC C200HS CPU31 E C200HE CPU32 Z C200HG CPU33 Z C200HG CPU53 Z C200HX CPU34 Z C200HX CPU54 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 E E E E E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU42 Z C200HG CPU43 Z C200HG CPU63 Z C200HX CPU44 Z C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU85 ZE CV1000 CPU01 EV1 E E E E E CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 SRM1 C02 V2 Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A XW2Z 200T 9 pin lt 9 pin 2 m XW2Z 500T 9 pin lt 9 pin 5 m Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B XW2Z 200S 25 pin lt 9 pin 2 m XW2Z 500S 25 pin lt 9 pin 5 m CPU Units of CVM1 CV series PLCs without the suffix EV_ cannot be con nected by any connection method When connecting to the peripheral port of a CS CJ series CPU Unit a CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable is required in addition to the above cables 76 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 13 Wiring for a Memory Link Connection oooooo0oo0o00000 Serial Port A 6 NT31 NT31C PLC Host link unit number Ea er FG hood 1 RS 232C interface 9 pin type 9 pin type Serial Port B NT31 NT31C PLC Host link unit Pin Abbreviatio Connector 14 RS 232C interface 9 pin type POOOOOOOO0
39. 422A 485 connector PLC side Pin number Abbreviation RS 422A connector OOWOWOOOO0O0O0GQ O O O O O O O O O O O 9 pin type 25 pin type For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 123 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 5 2 5 1 N Connection among RS 485 Ports The connection method in which the RS 485 ports of multiple NT31 NT31Cs and one host are connected in a 1 N connection is described here CPU Unit NT31 NT31C Eja lj a O pi E CS CuJ series C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H PLC Serial port B RS 485 25 pin type RS 485 cables max total length 500 m Reference e Communications using the RS 485 standard NT link 1 N method is pos sible only when a CS CJ series Serial Communications Board CS Series only or Serial Communications Unit is installed in a CS CJ series PLC a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX HG HE Z E or a CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed ina CQM1H e Communications using the RS 485 high speed NT link 1 N method is possible only when a CS CJ series Serial Communications Board CS Series only or Serial Communications Unit i
40. 6 E AT EA Rea eee Device Momitor F UnC OMe yi kre niru E EE 6 13 11 Compatible Systems eitis ek ew i ee ORR ELE wa 6 13 2 Connection Method 2 1205 0 s0 eetaecadratMie ac hd ra Nea OSS Method OL USCr5 pesuie hota bee thaw aaah saad eee a sae VERSION ISDIAY aradi Gahan ic Saad Wades blade eee bala bette bates Gil MMecihod Of US e346 he Se a ae See a lea Sa eee eetowl es 178 180 182 184 186 187 189 191 191 195 197 198 200 202 205 214 219 220 221 222 229 226 226 228 228 229 System Menu Operation Flow 6 1 Create the Screen Data Y Start Up the NT31 NT31C Display the System Menu page 133 Y Initialize the Memory page 140 Transmit the Screen Data page 155 Y Set the Memory Switches pages 158 169 189 Y Start Operation page 169 Y System Maintenance page 191 Section 6 1 System Menu Operation Flow Follow the procedure below when using the NT31 NT31C for the first time or changing the system program Create the data to be displayed on the NT31 NT31C by using the Support Tool For details on creating screen data refer to the NT series Support Tool Ver 4 _ for Windows Operation Manual V061 E1 L Turn ON the power to the NT31 NT31C If no screen data has been registered an error message is displayed In this case press the OK touch switch on the error message screen to display the System Menu If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is e
41. 7 3 Also discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the work e Do not carry the backlight unit by holding only its cable or pull on the cable Do not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock e Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it Replacing the Backlight Use the following procedure to replace the backlight AN WARNING Switch OFF the NT31 ST121j EV2 NT31C ST141j EV2 power before replacing the backlight Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock CAUTION Do not touch the backlight immediately after switching OFF the power supply Otherwise burn injuries may result due to the high temperatures Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below Procedure 1 2 3 1 Turn the power supply to the NT31 ST121LJ EV2 NT31C ST141L EV2 OFF 2 Disconnect the terminal block wiring the communications cable and the printer cable If a Memory Unit or Interface Unit is mounted remove that Unit also 3 Open the cover of the CFL unit housing by following the procedure de scribed below a Unscrew the screw in the center of the cover The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed but if it does come out for some reason and falls inside the PT it must be extricated with out fail b Open the cover while pressing the tabs at its left and right inward c When the cover has opened far enough remove it 4 Remove the CFL unit by following the proced
42. 8 Za gt RSB 25 pin type For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 Reference When using RS 485 as a port for the NT31 NT31C only NT link 1 N method standard or high speed can be used 83 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connecting an NT AL001 and Host NT31 NT31C Host NT ALOO1 tT RS 232C Wiring When Connecting a Host Link Unit 25 pin Applicable Units C200H LK201 V1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C500 LK203 3G2A6 LK201 EV 1 CV500 LK201 communications port 1 CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit CV500 LK201 has two types of connector a 25 pin connector communications port 1 and a 9 pin connector communi cations port 2 When using the communications port refer to Wiring for Con nections other than Memory Link page 84 PLC host link unit side NT AL001 side i ME RS 232C connector C 5 connector O O D oe Ee O o E Oo za O 6 Poe O oO O o OO O Oo 25 pin type Q 13 25 Wiring for Connections Other Than Memory Link Applicable Units CV500 LK201 communications port 2 CS1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR L CPM1A 10CDL1 L CPM1A 20CDL1 L CPM1A 30CDL1 L CPM1A 40CDL1 L CPM2A 30CDLILI L1 CPM2A 40CDUILI L1 CPM2A 60CDL IL l CPM2C 10000000 0O CPM2C 20000000 0O CQM1 CPU21 E CQM
43. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR X Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine
44. Battery Battery The voltage is within the normal range J or The voltage is lowered is displayed The voltage is within the normal range After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT31 NT31C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen 213 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Note When The voltage is lowered is displayed replace the built in battery immedi ately For details on the replacement method refer to 7 3 1 Replacing the Bat tery page 243 6 11 8 Checking Interfaces The NT31 NT31C allows the following communications functions to be checked e Communications with the Support Tool page 214 e Communications at serial ports page 215 e Communications with printers page 218 Checking Check communications with the Support Tool by following the menu operation Communications with the from the System Menu shown below Support Tool Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Select I O Check Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Screen Data Diep Calendar Check Select I F Check Quit I F Check Device Check 214 System Maintenance Checking Communications at Serial Ports Section 6 11 Select Tool Comm L F CHE Printer I F CHECK MENU lt TOOL COMM CHECKS i The check on communications with the Support Tool starts Download the screen data after connecting the host and comm
45. C Specifications The general specifications and communications specifications of the Adapter are shown below General Specifications poem Specification O O O S O Dimensions 30 W x 114 H x 100 2 D mm with the RS 422A terminal block cover closed 30 W x 114 H x 119 5 D mm with the RS 422A terminal block cover open 10 to 90 with no condensation 5 V 10 using pin No 6 of the RS 232C connector Insulation resistance 20 MQ or higher measured between all RS 422A terminal signal lines collectively and functional ground terminal with at 500 VDC Dielectric strength 1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS 422A terminal signal lines collectively and functional ground terminal Leakage current 10 mA max Storage ambient temperature 20 to 75 C Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz with 0 075 mm amplitude and 57 to 150 Hz with 9 8 m s acceleration for 60 minutes each in X Y and Z directions Shock resistance 147 m s2 3 times in each of X Y and Z directions Communications Specifications RS 232C Interface o o S RS 422A 485 Interface Pp tem Specification Communications speed Max 115 2k bps depends on the RS 232C communications speed Max 500 m 8 terminal detachable terminal block M3 0 261 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter Appendix C DIP Switch Settings The Adapter has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS 422A 485 communications conditions Before connecting the cable to the Adapter m
46. CN114 118 Connecting Cable CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect 4 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required 5 CPU Units of CVM1 CV series PLCs without the suffix EVO cannot be connected CS CJ series CPU Unit cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT link method Use the 1 N connection NT link method standard or high speed in stead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 64 or Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 69 Settings at The Host The setting methods for each Unit are as follows Connecting to a C series C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H or SRM1 PLC Setup Area Settings Write the PLC Setup area data memory settings directly from a Program ming Device e g SYSMAC support software in accordance with the host model and port Host Model Word Writing Value Setting RS 232C aoe of C200HS C200HX DM6645 4000 Use NT link HG HE Z E CPM2A CPM2C 1 1 CQM1 Coal SRM1 Port A of C200HX HG HE Z E 1 DM6555 Port 1 of CQM1H 2 Port B of C200HX HG HE Z E C1 DM6550 CPM1 a 1 RS 232C port of the Communications Board 2 RS 232C port of the Serial Communications Board For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area refer to the manual for the PLC which is used Connecting to a CPM2C The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port conne
47. CPUs manufactured before or during June 1995 lot No LIL165 the existing DIP switch settings differ from the existing PLC Setup as follows DIP switch settings 2 400 bps 1 stop bit even parity 7 bit data length PLC Setup 9 600 bps 2 stop bits even parity 7 bit data length For CPUs manufactured from July 1995 onward lot No L175 the stipulated values in the DIP switch settings also are 9 600 bps and 2 stop bits C series C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H CPU Units SRM1 The connection method depends upon the model of PLC being used as shown in the following table PLC model Connection method C200HS CQM1 Connect to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port C200HX HG HE Z E Connect to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port e Connect to one of the RS 232C ports port A or port B ona Serial Communications Board e Connect to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port e Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable e Connect to the RS 232C port port 1 on a Serial Communi cations Board CPM1 e Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 PLC model Connection method CPM2A SRM1 e Connect to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port e Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter Connect to the CPU Unit s RS 232C port or the perip
48. CS1W SCB41 V1 See note Note Cannot be used with the CS1D CPU65H 67H 59 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the settings are written they become effective by turn ing the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or execution of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the set tings are shown DM32000 DM32010 8000 Host link mode 2 stop bits even parity data length 7 bits DM32001 DM32011 0000 Communications speed 9600 bps 0007 Communications speed 19200 bps DM32002 DM32012 0000 Transmit delay time O ms DM32003 DM32013 0000 No CTS control Unit No 0 for host link Connecting to a CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit CS CJ series Rack mounting Unit CS1W SCU21 V1 CJU1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary switch located on the front panel Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the fol lowing Set the unit number to O through F so that it will not overlap with the numb
49. CTS selection selector switch Set this always to 0 V ON Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 C1000H C2000H Rack mounting Unit C500 LK203 Setting the Rear Switches e I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C 5 V supply ON OFF e Unit parity and transfer code deel 5 Set SW1 1 to SW1 7 to OFF 0 RS 232C 2 Synchronization a nterna External e Synchronization selector switch Terminator Set this to Internal OFF ON CTS e Communications speed External DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 0010 to select 19 200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled e CTS selection selector switch Set this always to 0 V ON 51 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 C200H C1000H C2000H CPU mounting Unit 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 Setting the Rear Switches e Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 5 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Parity is fixed at Even Parity Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits e Communications speed DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 0010 to select 19 200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps ABARARRAR 0 OFF 1 ON HEHHEGEH
50. Coni ruro esenea t 6 2ee Panes 6a04 Sees Shey eee Fes 15 1 3 1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected 15 1 3 2 Connecting to the HOS 34 5 settee G ies oe i See ee 16 1 4 Communications with the Host 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 16 1 4 1 Direct Connection Function 0 eee eee 16 e427 HOS Enk teaee shee heres toe kaoteweeteteatmarcededuee 17 lAo NECN seese snan hs ode haw eve ye Sed blac rao os ea bos 17 1 4 4 Connecting to other Companies PLCs 0 19 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links 0 0 0 0 ee eee 19 Fadel Memory Cinik sariak Shd aoe Pikes Hee iad te da See aes 19 1 5 2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link 20 1 5 3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function 20 lo Beroe Oprane 16 d oki wore heer nd Mae ame swe teak ea ds 21 Role and Operation of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 1 1 1 Role and Operation of the NT31 NT31C 1 1 1 Production Line Status Monitoring Directions to Workers on the Shop Floor Panel Switch Functions The NT31 NT31C is a sophisticated display unit Programmable Terminal which automatically displays information and can also be used for operations when necessary The following gives a general description of the role and operation of the NT31 NT31C for those using a programmable terminal PT for the first time Operation of an NT31 NT31C at an FA Production Site The NT31 NT31C display
51. FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed Send the com mand from the host e f communications with the host is normal the data received from the host is displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data e If nothing is displayed at Received Data when the command is sent from the host there is a communications fault check the communications cables and settings For a Bar Code Reader lt BAR CODE READER CHECK gt lt Comm Port A gt Check the setting of memory SW and the BCR and connect the PT to the BCR with the Comm Port A Received Data FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF The check starts when the check screen is displayed Read data with the bar code reader in this status e f communications with the bar code reader is normal the read character strings are displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data 216 System Maintenance Section 6 11 e If nothing is displayed at Received Data when data is read with the bar code reader there is a communications fault check the communications cables and settings Check Method Check communications with the serial ports by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode NTENANCE MODE MENU Selec
52. Function and 2 15 2 Alarm History Record Function in the Reference Manual System Settings Section 6 9 Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode E MENU Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Sereen Data Diep Calendar Check Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the second memory Pt Up Wait Time asec switch setting screen Select Memory Switch Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF er Controller ESC P Print Method Tone J Press Hist Disp Method to display the sel required display order creen oaver i wil canta The setting option changes each time Green eae the touch switch is pressed Start up Time Amin No Movemnet a a e e 5 5 a Hist Disp Methodi From New Data Resume Function OFF To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU
53. HE Z E Word Setting Setting Contents DM6555_ 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communications conditions set by the contents of DM DM6556 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps DM6558 0000 Unit 00 When using a CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 Word Setting Setting Contents DM6650 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communications conditions set by the contents of DM DM6651 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps DM6653 0000 Unit 00 When using a CQM1H Word Setting Setting Contents DM6550 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communications conditions set by the contents of DM DM6551 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps DM6553 0000 Unit 00 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting to a CPM2C The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS CJ series PLCs The CPM2C s communications port handles both RS 232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally Therefore when using the CPM2C it is necessary to select RS 232C or peripheral port
54. Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 The connection method in which the RS 485 ports of an NT31 NT31C anda host are connected is described here 119 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 NT31 NT31C CS CuJ series C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H PLC Serial port B RS 485 25 pin type 25 pin connector be z m RS 485 cable with connectors max length 500 m Reference When RS 485 is used at the PT side only the NT link 1 N method standard or high speed can be used Connecting an NT31 NT31C and Host NT31 NT31C Host RS 485 LALI Wiring When Connecting a CS series Serial Communications Board CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit C series C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board or CQM1H Serial Communications Board Applicable Units CS1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V 1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H E V1 CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H E V1 CS1D CPU65H 67H See note C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE 85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 61 C200HX CPU65 ZE 85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 61 Note A Serial Communications Board cannot be used 120 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 O O O O O O O O O O O OOOOWOVOO0O0CO0GQ
55. Made by JAE 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Cable TKVVBS4P 03 Tachii Electric Wire Co Ltd Crimp 1 25 N3A Japan Solderless Recommended cable size terminals fork type Terminal MFG AWG2 to 18 Y1 25 3 5L Molex Inc 0 3 to 0 75 mm fork type The terminal screws of the NI ALOO1 are M3 specification When wiring use crimp terminals for M3 use Tighten terminal screws with a tightening torque of 0 5 N m Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring Examples of applicable terminals Fork type Round type O4 6 2 mm max nax J 6 2 mm max 5 1 5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications The serial port B connector of the NT31 NT31C has a terminal resistance set ting terminal TRM In RS 422A 485 communications a terminal resistor must be set at the device at the end of the communications cable but not at any other device The NT31 NT31C has a built in terminal resistor and whether or not the ter minal resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance set ting terminals pins No 9 and 10 of serial port B The terminal resistance is 120 Q When carrying out RS 422A 485 communications using serial port B short between terminals No 9 and 10 at the NT31 NT31C at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Leave terminals No 9 and 10 open at NT31 NT31C PTs other than the one at the end of the cable When not using RS 422A 485 communications the terminal resistance set ting i
56. Menu Operation cccccccscccssccseee BI 6 1 System Menu Operation Flow 0 0 0 eee eee eee 6 2 Starnes the NES UNIS ici pice heehee S kh etharte dea ieee ys bea toate iteedases 6 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu 0 0 eens 64 Memory Initialization sie o4 desde ae a ok oh as aed ci wa ha E a be Be 140 Vii TABLE OF CONTENTS 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode 0 0000 ccs 150 6 6 Transmitting the Screen Datas amp 4 3 des t8 ro nth Sard ave Shad wes Bad GK Shas ues SS dee wd HER EES 155 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches 158 O o Star NNE Operation 4 c a6 uae aye aay ea a Shed a ae he hk re Wo rk Rae 169 6 9 Syse SCN Ss aces babes hey ee tee oe ee ho eeoreee Marines eile see e ge oie 169 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function 0 0 cee 189 Geli System Maintenant a4 sted 6 oh rach Ge aeaee dd Sige ke iar el te eta es Bee at de BE ae 191 6 12 Programming Console Funci n es seiseanan Cast donee gee ee ee ee ee hee ace See 219 6 13 Device Monitor PUnchON 22cieacate ieehescaee deetesiated a a a a 225 A VerDate eaaa a a a AE ea 228 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance ssssecscsess 231 Jel APOUDIGSHOOUNS sene ha ohn eel E wand ee Bea E edna SEERA REAA 232 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 0 0 ccc ee eee eens 235 7 3 Maintenance ofthe NISIWINTS LE 3 nae acVes gcNeeet Nec
57. NT31C types Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 1 2 3 Comparison between NT30 NT30C and NT31 NT31C pte momoe ONN O Support Tool used NT ZJCAT1 EV4 or NT ZA3AT NT ZJCAT1 EV4 EV2 e Serial port A connector also used for screen data transfer 9 pin port for screen data transfer e Serial port B connector for host communications only 25 pin Replacement backlight NT30 CFL01 NT30C CFL01 NT31C CFL01 Same for both the NT31 ST121L EV2 and NT31C ST141L EV2 The backlight cannot be replaced by the user for the NT31 ST122L EV2 NT31C ST142Ll EV2 NT31 ST123L EV3 and NT31C ST143L EV3 data including system installer port Tool Number of user registered Maximum of 2000 Maximum of 3999 screens Screen data capacity 512 KB 1 MB User program memory Numeral string data Maximum of 1000 Maximum of 2000 Character string data Maximum of 1000 Maximum of 2000 Mathematical tables None 256 max Calculations can be executed automatically in the PT Image data Maximum of 224 Maximum of 4095 2 Library data Maximum of 896 Maximum of 12288 2 Method for storing numeric val Fixed as BCD binary coded dec Selectable from BCD binary coded decimal or binary ues imal numeral memory data and PT status control area Lamp Touch switch labels Fixed display 1 line only e Multiple lines can be displayed e ON OFF switching is possible e Numeral display is possible e Character string display is possible Interlo
58. Port and SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port In an RS 422A 485 connection the Make the NT31 NT31C and PLC termination resis terminator setting is incorrect tance settings correctly SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port In an NT Link 1 N connection there Make the settings again so that there is no duplica is duplication in the unit numbers tion 6 7 4 Setting the NT Link 1 N Method Stan dard High speed page 164 The power to the NT31 NT31C NT Check the power supply ALO01 or host is OFF The buzzer has sounded Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the and the RUN LED is OFF conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 The NT31 NT31 has developed trou Contact your OMRON service center ble The touch panel does not Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the respond conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 The touch panel is broken Test the touch panel with I O Check in the MAINTE NANCE MODE menu If there is an error contact your OMRON service center The PLC mode has The NT31 NT31C changes the mode This is an NT31 NT31C specification When using a changed to the monitor when host link communications are PLC that can also be connected using the NT Link mode used method use an NT Link con
59. RS 422A Type em Specification EIA RS A22A Connector 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 500 m For an NT Link 1 N RS 232C Type Pp ttem Specification OOOO Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 to 8 Transmission distance Max 15 m To connect two or more PTs NT AL001 Adapters are required When using an NT AL001 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable 2 m max e RS 422A 485 cable Total length 500 m max For an NT Link 1 N RS 422A 485 Type tem Specification Communications standard EIA RS 422A 485 Connector 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 to 8 Transmission distance Max 500 m For a High speed NT Link 1 N RS 232C Type po tem Specification OO O Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Serial port A 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 to 8 Transmission distance Max 15 m To connect two or more PTs NT AL001 Adapters are required When using an NT AL001 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable 2 m max e RS 422A 485 cable Total length 500 m max 252 Specifications Appendix A For a High speed NT Link 1 N RS 422A 485 Type tem Speci
60. RS 485 RS 232C max 500 m max 2 m 1 N connection via a convertor unit PT Convertor unit NT AL001 RS 485 RS232C total length 500 m max 2 m RS 485 max 500 m 1 N connection page 124 PT RS 485 total length 500 m O Connection possible x Connection not possible e The RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT ALOO1 requires 5 V 150 mA at pin 6 of the RS 232C connector Check the signals of the RS 232C connector at the host e 5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT31 NT31C When connect ing an NT ALOO1 at serial port B a separate power supply is required for the NT ALOO1 e The cable of an NT ALOO1 cannot be connected or disconnected while the power is ON Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power supply from the RS 232C cable is OFF while the host power supply is OFF e NT link 1 N connection is possible even when RS 232C is used at the NT31 NT31C side for communications with the host but in this case one NT ALOO1 Adapter is required for each NT31 NT31C In this case it is convenient to use serial port A of the NT31 NT31C 5 V is not output from serial port B Direct 1 1 connection page 119 PT 26 Names and Functions of Parts Section 2 2 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts Before starting operation the names and functions of the parts of the NT31 NT31C are described here as a confirmation A method of hardware setti
61. S 2806 oniy XW2Z 200P Host Link Units with a 25 pin Serial port B host link 25 pin lt gt 25 pin XW2Z 500P connector RS 232C only XW2Z 200S Host Link Units with a 9 pin con ne port B host link NT Link 25 pin lt gt 9 pin XW2Z 500S nector RS 232C only XW2Z 070T 1 CPU Units with a 9 pin connec Host Link 1 1 NT Link or 1 N 9 pin lt gt 9 pin XW2Z 200T 1 2m tor The PLC supplies 5 V NT Link using NT ALO01 E for NT ALOO1 E connections The following PLCs can supply 5 V C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H CPM2A CPM2C CS1G H D and CJ1G H M 283 Model List Appendix J Cables with Connectors Weer Cable Length GV500 CN228 am pin male Spin mal xw2z 001 sm SSS Rin female gt 14 pin male xW22 S002 2m p female epn male The XW2Z S001 is a converting cable A CV500 CN228 must be purchased separately for connection to a computer Connection Cable Model Specification AWG28x5P IFVV SB Multicore cable manufactured by Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB 5Px28AWG Multicore cable manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd Applicable Connectors Name moa OO o Specifico O OO O O Connector XM2A 2501 25 pin type male made by OMRON XM2D 2501 25 pin type female made by OMRON for personal computers 9 pin type male made by OMRON 9 pin type female made by OMRON for personal computers 25 pin type male made by JAE Connector hood Printer Cable Model Specification OO O O O OO S
62. Setting the Start up Wait Time The Start up Wait Time is the time lapse until the NT31 NT31C switches to the RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been reset Set this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation Nothing is displayed during the Start up Wait Time The setting range is O to 10 seconds The default factory setting is OOsec Set the system start up wait time by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Transmit Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Quit NU a sai 1 4 Press Start up Wait Time to display the Fare nl required time lapse Wait Time WSe The setting option changes each time the Key Press Sound ON touch switch is pressed according to the following sequence 01 02 03 09 10 OO 01 Printer So Print Method Tone To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in e
63. The CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board cannot be used Use the CS1W SCU31 V1 Serial Communications Unit 3 A CS1W SCU31 V1 or CS1W SCU41 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required Settings at the Host Connecting to a CS series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board equipped with an RS 422A 485 port for CS series CPU Units CS1W SCB41 V1 Port 2 is an RS 422A 485 port CS series Serial Communications Boards and Units with lot number 991220 December 20 1999 or later support the high speed 1 N NT Link method Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used Setting the Front Switches Set the switches on the Serial Communications Board as shown below 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A or 2 wire RS 485 Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Port 1 RS 232C Terminator Switch TERM Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE Port 2 RS 422A Set to 4 right side for 4 wire type RS 422A 485 RS 485 Set to 2 left side for 2 wire type CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the comm
64. The direct connection function allows the data to be displayed at the NT31 NT31C to be read from the memory area in the PLC and written to memory tables in the NT31 NT31C Also the data input at the NT31 NT31C can be written to the memory area in the PLC The NT31 NT31C screen can be changed in accordance with statuses in the PLC memory area and the NT31 NT31C s status data can be written to the PLC s memory area NT31 NT31C PLC DM area I O relay area Lt Auxiliary relay area Timers counters The direct connection function has the following features e The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction infor mation and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any area of the PLC memory e Since the NT31 NT31C can directly refer to PLC bit and word data without using the program at the PLC it can be connected to the PLC without changing the PLC program which controls the currently running produc tion line e The area to control and provide notification of NT31 NT31C status includ ing display screens display no display status and buzzer output can be freely allocated to any part of the PLC data area This means that the PLC status can be read and controlled just by reading this area at the PLC side without preparing a special communications program The direct connection function allows the NT31 NT31C to directly read and write almost all bits and words in the PLC and to autom
65. The settings remain as they were before the operation was started e If writing of the settings fails a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed After the settings have been written the System Installer mode menu screen is redisplayed 6 5 4 Clearing Screen Data If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31 NT31C cannot be started normally use this function to clear the screen data Note that only the screen data is cleared initialized and the memory switch settings and the display history alarm history record data are retained Reference e When this function is used all of the screen data contents registered in the NT31 NT31C up to that point are cleared Check that the created screens are backed up at the Support Tool before using it e The screen data can also be cleared from the System Menu page 140 154 Transmitting the Screen Data Section 6 6 e If the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode the message Screen Data Corrupted may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode If this happens initialize the screen data again from the MEMORY INIT MENU screen Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below P mey Select Erase Screen Data Exit System Installer Download System Program Change System Settings Erase Screen Data Select Yes Erase Screen Data The screen data is cleared During Are you sure clearance th
66. Unit flash memory or during write processing An error occurred during verification processing at the flash memory of the NT31 NT31C or the Memory Unit An attempt is made to transmit data other than a system program or the system program of a dif ferent PLC model into the NT31 NT31C as the sys tem program An attempt is made to write a system program into the NT31 NT31C as screen data Turn the NT31 NT31C power OFF then back ON If the error recurs the flash memory at the write desti nation may be faulty In this case replace the PT Turn the NT31 NT31C power OFF then back ON If the error recurs the flash memory at the write desti nation may be faulty In this case replace the PT Perform either of the following pro cedures e Turn the NT31 NT31C power OFF correct the DIP switch set tings of the Memory Unit and then turn the power back ON e Turn the NT31 NT31C power OFF set the DIP switch settings to the manual transmission and then check the data inside the Memory Unit SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 232C port of the PT 4 1 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host 0 2 46 A t 1 HostTypes and Seuinese cN2cacdaveatMecachadeckeca eda cack 46 4 1 2 Connecting Directly between RS 232C Ports 73 45 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Sect
67. V1 and H and Serial Communications Boards and Units and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 12 20 99 and later support the high speed 1 N NT Link Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used 282 Model List Appendix J RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT ALOO1 RS 232C 9 pin connector RS 422A 8 pin terminal block RS 232C Adaptor RS 422A Adaptor Specification CPM1 CIFO1 Links the RS 232C port of an NT31 NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 compatible with host link and NT Link 1 1 CPM1 CIF11 Links the RS 422A port of an NT31 NT31C and the peripheral port of a CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 compatible with host link Related Parts and Equipment for PT Support Tool NT ZJCAT 1 EV4 Compatible with PC AT personal computers For Windows 95 98 NT4 0 2000 XP English version CD ROM cae The Support Tool indicated above includes the system installer and the standard system programs Ver 3 LJ Ver 4 1 for the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C System programs for the earlier NT30 620 PTs are also included Cables with Connectors for PT lt gt PLC NT ALO01 E Modei CableLength Applicable Units Communications Method Specification XW2Z 200S 2m Host Link Units with a 25 pin Serial port A host link 9 pin lt gt 25 pin xw2zso0s sm eomecior RS 282C only XW2Z 200T 2m o Host Link Units with a 9 pin con nen port A host link NT Link 9 pin lt 9 pin xW2Z 500T
68. Ver 2 1L Hardware NT31 ST1211_ EV1 NT31 ST121 122 _ EV2 NT31C ST141 EV1 NT31C ST141 142 EV2 The following functions new functions supported by the V2 cannot be used e Additional data areas accessible in CS CJ series PLCs e The CS Cu series high speed 1 N NT Link e Interlock function that controls touch switches numeral inputs and character string inputs e Mathematical function e Device Monitor function e NT30 620 compatible mode e Expanded capabilities for label guide character displays including multiple lines of text ON OFF switching displays numeral memory table displays and character string memory table displays System program Ver 3 0L All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used The system program s version can be checked from the System Menu 276 Relationship between System Program and Hardware Appendix Combining a EV2 Version and Version without a EVL_ Suffix System program Ver 1 0L System program Ver 3 0L The following functions cannot be used e Analogue meter e High definition font display e Installation of system programs using Memory Unit e Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs e Memory link e Window control from the host e Multiple display of window screens e Moving a window e Additional data areas accessible in CS CJ series PLCs e The CS Cu series high speed 1 N NT Link e Interlock function that controls touc
69. abouts AND OR XEM i Ee BEDE MONT TOR BUN PRUGRAM Ss 7 8 9 ExT CHG SAG 4 5 6 SA DEL MNI a 2 e REC BESET INS t iir VER l Programming Console Key Sheet for CS1 Series PROGRAMMING CONSULE OMRON ZPROGRAMS FUN SFT NOT re Te BHFT SE ET E 7 33 9 fete CHG eg 6 leer DEL MON seee CULE Differences with Respect e Programs cannot be stored recorded or read replayed If it is neces to Programming Consoles sary to store or read a program use a Programming Device e It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound Whether or not the key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the Key Press Sound memory switch of the NT31 NT31C It sounds when the set ting is ON and does not when the setting is OFF page 171 e f an error occurs when using the Programming Console function an error screen is displayed Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is determined by the setting for the Buzzer Sound memory switch of the NT31 NT31C page 172 224 Section 6 13 Device Monitor Function Reference A communications error will occur if you use the Programming Console func tion to change the communications settings in the PLC Setup that govern the port to which the NT31 NT31C is connected In this case the Programming Console function will be unusable 6 13 Device Monitor Function Caution Reference The NT31 NT31C has been equipped with the Device Moni
70. and messages contents of character string memory tables set for bit memory tables that come ON are displayed For the alarm history bit memory tables for which the history property is set are continually monitored and the time when they come ON and number of times they come ON are recorded and displayed together with the message character string set for the bit memory table The NT31 NT31C allows selection of the display order as the newest record first or the oldest record first by memory switch setting The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present time The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which alarms occurred in the past and how many times alarms have occurred Alarm List Message character string table No 32 set for bit memory table No 14 Character string table No 32 Character string table No 50 Image library data 1002 Character string table No 32 No 14 G a0 Image library data 113C 1 L001003 lt 1 ON i No 15 _ 0 D010015 data 113C Image library data 1125 When the message displayed is pressed the image library data 113C set for bit memory table No 14 is displayed Alarm History Message character string table No 13 set for bit memory table No 24 Character string table No 11 No 22 Image library data 005F Character string table No 12 No 23 Image library d
71. and the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 143 Memory Initialization 6 4 3 144 Section 6 4 Initializing Alarm History Record Data Reference The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits that have been designated in advance with a bit memory table and records the time when any of the bits is set to 1 comes ON and the number of times that each bit comes ON The maximum number of records is 256 for sort by occurrence order of error occurrence and 255 for sort by frequency order of the number of times each error has occurred Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history record data to 0 for example when the screen data has been changed etc Also if Screen Use Ring Buffer under History Setting in the PT Environment Settings System Settings has not been checked no more records will be stored after the maximum number of records has been kept and therefore the records must be periodically initialized If Screen Use Ring Buffer is checked when the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded The NT31 NT31C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized by controlling the PT status control area from the host For details refer to 2 2 1 PT Status Control Area in the Reference Manual Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Initialize the alarm history record data b
72. clear the history record data to 0 for example when the screen data has been changed etc Also if Alarm Use Ring Buffer under History Setting of System in PT Configuration Tools has not been checked no more records will be stored after the maxi mum number of records has been kept and therefore the records must be periodically initialized If Alarm Use Ring Buffer is checked when the maxi mum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the new est data is recorded The NT31 NT31C also allows the display history record data to be initialized by controlling the PT status control area from the host For details refer to 2 2 1 PT Status Control Area in the Reference Manual Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below SYSTEM MENU Select Maintenance Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Select Memory Init PT Settings Memory Switch Alarm History 1 0 Settings Screen Data Disp Calendar Check 1 0 Check Select Display History Select Yes The display history record data is initialized During initialization the message Initializing is displayed If No is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the display history record data On completion of display history record data initialization the message Fin ished is displayed
73. connector female serial port A Data format 254 Appendix B Dimensions 183 5 7 22 142 5 59 195 7 68 Units mm inch 130 5 5 14 0 20 54 2 13 p lt With memory unit installed NT MF261 74 2 91 255 Dimensions Appendix B Mounting Dimensions Mounting panel Mounting fixture 15 5 0 61 145 5 71 34 1 34 min 38 1 5 max gt Units mm inch 206 8 11 256 Dimensions Appendix B Cable Connection Dimensions with NT MF261 96 3 78 10 2 0 47 3 58 she 60 2 36 e Units mm inch 257 Dimensions Appendix B 258 Appendix C Using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter This section outlines the external dimensions procedure for mounting and removal and specifications of an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT ALOO1 E Refer to this information when designing the control panel For details refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT ALOO1 E Dimensions 110 4 33 M e 74 5 2 93 lt 100 2 3 94 lt 105 4 13 max gt wawb o E eA AHH Units mm inch 30 W x 114 H x 100 2 D mm wit
74. day or replace screen data with maintenance screen data for maintenance For more details on the memory link online transfer function refer to informa tion on the memory link online transfer function in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual 1 6 Before Operating Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT31 NT31C NT31 NT31C Support Tool Set the host settings Install the PT in the Install the Support operation panel Tool at the computer e For the host link refer to age 30 pages 46 and 96 and the pagean Refer to the manual for manuals for the host link the Support Tool unit and peripheral tools Connect the power supply e For the NT link 1 1 refer page 31 to pages 61 and 107 For the NT link 1 N refer Gi to pages 64 and 109 Install the system program For the high speed NT link Refer to page 151 and 1 N refer to pages 69 the Support Tool manual and 113 EP H Make the settings in the Create the screens Le ee ee Refer to the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C page 151 Programmable Terminal Reference Manual and the Support Tool Operation Manual page 155 Transmit the screen data Set the memory switches page 158 Vv Connectio the Connect to the host NT31 NT31C When RS 232C used at
75. does not support the Programming Console func tion A Programming Console is con nected It is not possible to use a Programming Console and the Programming Console function at the same time Disconnect the Programming Con sole The connecting cable is defective Check the cable connection and perform a con ductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 It is not possible to use a Programming Console and the Programming Console function at the same time Disconnect the Programming Con sole The communications conditions at Set the communications conditions at the PLC to the PLC have been changed in match the conditions set in the System Menu accordance with the NT31 NT31C Programming Console function A Programming Console is con nected 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT31 NT31C data is initialized and during data setting and transmission and their remedies Flash Memory Error Flash Memory I O Error lf this happens frequently Flash Memory may be broken Press Reset Switch to restart Calendar Data Error Calendar Data is incorrect Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and set Calendar Data There is a hardware fault or the If the same message is displayed eve
76. e System installer page 33 System installer made by OMRON The system installer is supplied as a standard accessory with the Support Tool NTZJCAT1 EV4 Reference The following optional devices are available All of them can be used either with NT31 or NT31C 15 Communications with the Host Section 1 4 Reflection suppressing protective sheet NT30 KBA04 Chemical resistant cover NT30 KBA0O1 Replacement battery 3G2A9 BAT08 1 3 2 Connecting to the Host The NT31 NT31C has the following two communications ports e Serial port A e D SUB 9 pin connector e For RS 232C use only The Support Tool and bar code readers can be connected here e Serial port B e D SUB 25 pin connector e For RS 232C or RS 422A 485 Selectable by memory switch e The Support Tool and bar code readers cannot be connected here The host can be connected at either of these two ports The connection methods for each communications method at the PT and host sides are indicated below Make the settings in accordance with the communi cations method that can be used with the PLC to be connected and the condi tions at the operation site Reference When using an RS 232C 422A Adapter NT AL001 with the host link or NT link 1 1 communications method RS 485 cannot be used The connection must be made with RS 232C or RS 422A 1 4 Communications with the Host The NT31 NT31C is connected to the host by one of the following communi cations methods
77. each time the touch switch is pressed In this example serial port A is used for a standard 1 N NT Link Comm Port A NT Link 1 N rs Speed andar Press Quit Comm Port A NT Link 1 N The unit number and communications speed are set Comm Standard e To quit the unit number communications speed setting screen without confirming the unit number communications speed settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 with the previous settings still in effect Reference Unit numbers are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are con nected to one host so that the host can identify the individual PTs The unit numbers that can be set differ according to the host model as follows e C200HE ZE Unit numbers 0 to 3 maximum of 4 PTs per host port e C200HG ZE C200HX ZE Unit numbers 0 to 7 maximum of 8 PTs per host port When making the settings make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers among PTs On completion of unit number communications speed setting a the NT31 NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31
78. error occurs the System Menu can be displayed from the error message screen Disabling enabling Writing to The Screen Data Memory When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting it is impossible to use the following System Menu functions e Switching to the Transmit mode e Displaying the memory switch setting screens e Checking the screen data memory e Displaying the initialization menu e Displaying the calendar time setting screen the calendar time display screen can be displayed 153 Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below Select Change System Settings Menu Exit System Installer Download System Program Change System Settings Erase Screen Data Select Display System Menu or Screen Memory Protect System Installer Ver 1 A Change System Settings x OK Kk Each time either of these items is selected cancel the setting switches from Disabled to Enabled or vice versa Display System Menu Disabled Screen Memory Protect Disabled System Installer Ver 1 AA Select OK Change System settings ok The settings are written to the NT31 NT31C while the screen is displayed Display System Menu Disabled Screen Memory Protect Disabled e If Cancel is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the System Installer mode menu without changing the settings
79. from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode AINTENANCE MODE MENU Select Memory Switch Calendar Check 1 0 Check MEMORY SWITCH gt Press Printer Controller to display the 1 4 t required printer type Start up an l l Wait Time Ser The setting option changes each time Key Prese Sound ON the touch switch is pressed Printer ESO Print Method Tone To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen 174 System Settings Section 6 9 e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 6 Setting the Print Method NT31C Only Reference The NT31 NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31 NT31C When using the NT31C the currently displayed screen image or other data can be printed out in color You can select whether screen data is actually printed out in color or in monochrome tones that represent colors with this memory switc
80. highest unit number of the connected PTs 0 to 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 hex for the baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 hex Compatible Host Units Only OMRON s CS CJ series PLCs support the high speed 1 N NT Link through RS 422A RS 485 The high speed 1 N NT Link must be established through a Serial Communications Board Unit Even CS series Units without the V1 suffix can be connected via a high speed 1 N NT Link by mounting a Serial Communications Board Unit Be sure to check the model number of the PLC and Board Unit before trying to establish the high speed 1 N NT Link The following table shows which CS series PLCs can be connected to an NT31 NT31C with the high speed 1 N NT Link through RS 422A RS 485 CPU Units with built CPU Units supporting Model Name in high speed NT link connection through a Serial Communications Board Unit CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 _ CS1G CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 CS1H 67 E v1 0 CS1D CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 9 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 9 TA CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board or CS1W SCU31 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required 113 114 Reference Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 2 This CPU Unit is for a Duplex CPU Unit System
81. in CPU Units Connectable Connectable with Expansion Commu to nications Board C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU33 C200HG C200HG CPU63 Z E NT Link Function PLC Series C series C200HS CPU21 E EC C200HS C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU42 C200HE CPU32 Z C200HE Z E C200HE CPU42 Z Z Z E C200HG CPU43 Z C200HG CPU53 Z C200HG CPU63 Z C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E X200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE C200HX CPU34 Z C200HX Z E C200HX CPU44 Z C200HX CPU54 Z C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE mmm Mm mmmm m m CPM1 10CDR L 2 CPM1 20CDR U 2 CPM1 30CDR U 2 CPM1A 10CDL1 L 2 CPM1A 20CDL1 L C2 CPM1A 30CDL L 2 CPM1A 40CDL L 2 CPM2A 30CD00 0 CPM2A 40CD00 0 CPM2A 60CD00 0 CPM2C 10000000 0 9 CPM2C 20000000 0 9 CQM1 CPU41 EV1 CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1 CPU45 EV1 CQM1H CPU21 E CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU51 E 4 CQM1H CPU61 E Se CV series 5 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 C2000 CVM1 series CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 5 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CompoBus S SRM1 C02 V 1 SRM1 Master Control Unit CVM1 CPU21 EV2 61 62 Reference Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 lOne of the following Communications Boards is required C200HW COM02 COM04 COM05 COMO06 EV1 2 A CPM1 CIFO01 adapter is required 3 Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W
82. in the Reference Manual for details Touch switch does not The interlock function is set for the Touch switches are disabled when the corresponding work Buzzer sounds touch switch and the controlling inter interlock bit is OFF Check the status of the corre lock bit is OFF sponding interlock bit and turn it ON The display is dim Insufficient contrast or brightness Increase the contrast brightness pages 191 and 193 Backlight defective or its life has Replace the backlight page 241 expired The display is too faint The contrast is too high Reduce the contrast page 191 234 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 an The digits in numeral dis The number of digits of a numeric Confirm the values of the PLC words allocated to the play come out as x value in a numeral memory table numeral memory table exceeds the set number Allocate one PLC word to each numeral memory table X or xxx is displayed in The numeric value in the numeral Check the values of the PLC words allocated to the the numeral display or memory table exceeds the number of numeral memory table entry numeral input field display digits Allocate only one word to each numeral memory table entry if the numeral display or numeral input field has 4 digits or less 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages When the NT31 NT31C displays an error message find the corresponding symptoms in the appropriate ta
83. installed or if the system program is destroyed the System Installer mode is automatically established when the power is switched ON To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or make settings for data management either turn the power ON or reset the NT31 NT31C while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the touch panel size 7 2 mm x 7 2 mm Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 Selecting Menu Items Switching from the System Menu to the RUN Mode Reference Switch the power to the NT31 NT31C ON while pressing this touch switch ATS aa RL CT CICA Select language BA mais Japanese English The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT31 NT31C screen as touch switches Menu items can be selected simply by pressing them Example Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing Maintenance Mode in the System Menu TSYSTEM MENUT Press Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MEND JI it Qui Return to the RUN mode by selecting Quit in the System Menu and other menus Unlike previous PT models the NT31 NT31C does not return to the RUN mode automatically if no operations are performed 139 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 6 4 Memory Initialization The NT31 NT31C has the following initialization functions Use them as nec essary e Clearing scree
84. is allo cated Window Control Area Word at the host to which the window control area is allocated Numeric Expression Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of host words to which numeral memory tables are allocated numeric value storage method Expansion I F Type of Unit installed at the expansion interface connector Compatibility Sets whether or not to use NT30 620 compatible mode for screen data Sets whether to operate as a normal NT31 631 or emulate many key NT30 620 characteristics Display Contents of The Second Screen Comm Port A Communications type set for serial port A fixed as RS 232C Comm Method Communications method set for serial port A Comm Setting Communications conditions set for serial port A display con tents differ according to the communications method Display Contents of The Third Screen Comm Port B Communications type set for serial port B RS 232C RS 422A Comm Method Communications method set for serial port B Comm Setting Communications settings set for serial port B display con tents differ according to the communications method 197 System Maintenance Display Method Section 6 11 Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Select PT Settings Switch the screen S re ae by pressing the J next screen or T previous screen Screen Data Type OMRON tou
85. key displayed states when pressed During the lock ON state mode selection key operations are ineffective The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during the lock ON status and during the lock OFF status When the Programming Console function starts the lock ON status is estab lished If the RUN MONITOR or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock OFF status the mode changes and the lock ON status is established During Lock OFF RUN mode MONITOR mode PROGRAM mode MOUNT TOR MONT TOR MONT TOR PROGRAM PROGRAM RUN gave i W During Lock ON RUN mode MONITOR mode PROGRAM mode MUN TOR PROGRAM Programming Console Keyboard The Programming Console keyboard used on the screen when the Program ming Console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches shown by the dashed line frames in the figure below On pressing a touch switch a key operation is executed However since there is a discrepancy between the size of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches take care to press as close to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below 223 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 In addition if the connected host is the CS1G CS1H the Programming Con sole key sheet for the CS Series is automatically displayed Standard Programming Console Key Sheet PROGRAMMING CONSOLE OMRON lt PROGREM gt WSET NOT
86. method can be used by installing a Serial Communications Board Unit In addition some C200HX HG HE Z E CPU Units can be connected in the host link method by installing a Communications Board Check the model and series of the PLC the type of installed Serial Communi cations Board Serial Communications Unit or Host Link Unit before making a connection Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 The Units that can be connected to the NT31 NT31C by the host link method using the RS 232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table below Units with Built in Host Link CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Unit or Series Function Host Link Units or Expansion Communications able to Communications Board Unit Board Unit CS CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1W SCU21 V1 CS1G Series CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 CS1W SCB21 V1 CS1H E V1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1W SCB41 V1 CS1D CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H S H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H CS1D CPU65H 67H 1 CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1G Series CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H_ CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1W SCU41 V1 CJ1H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 C200HE CPU42 E C200HE CPU32 42 E C200HW COM02 04 C200HE C200HG CPU43 63 E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HX CPU44 64 E C200HG C200HG Z C200HX C2
87. one PT One Memory Unit can store the screen data for two PTs Note 1 Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or dis connecting a Memory Unit After mounting a Memory Unit be sure to tighten its two screws 2 During data transmission do not turn off the power supply to the NT31 NT31C or reset it 3 Do not touch the PCB printed circuit board with bare hands Reference e When a Memory Unit is mounted the NT31 NT31C cannot be set to the operating status On completion of data transmission with a Memory Unit always disconnect the Memory Unit from the NT31 NT31C before starting NT31 NT31C operation Memory Units NI MF261 can be used in common for the following PT models NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C One Memory Unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models However since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31 NT31C and NT631 NT631C an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data with an NT31C The data must be converted using the Support Tool Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and NT31C and between the NT631 and NT631C the display may not be correct since these models have different numbers of colors One Memory Unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of differ ent models In order to transmit a system program from the Memory Unit to the NT31 NT31C the system program must be compatible to the target PT m
88. operating mode and read change data in the PLC s memory areas The NT link is compatible with the host link The NT31 NT31C screen data and PLC programs used with the host link direct connection method can be used with the NT link method as they are 1 4 4 Connecting to other Companies PLCs Installing a system program for multi venders by using a specific system installer enables the NT31 NT31C to be connected to the PLCs of other mod els in direct connection This system installer is supplied with the Support Tool NT ZJCAT1 EV4 Compatible PLC The NT31 NT31C can be connected to the following model PLCs e Mitsubishi A series programmable controller computer link module e Mitsubishi FX series programmable controller e SLC 500 Series by Allen Bradley e 90 20 and 90 30 Series by GE Fanuc e S7 300 and S7 400 Series by Siemens For details on the procedure for connecting to other model PLCs refer to the PLC Connection Manual or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links In this section a communications method other than the direct connection called the memory link is discussed 1 5 1 Memory Link Memory link is a method to send and receive data between a personal com puter or a FA computer and the NT31 NT31C by using RS 232C 422A com munications In memory link there is an area called PT Memory as shown below inside the NT31 NT31C and this area is treated as a virtual area on the
89. program installed in the NT31 31C Version Display Section 6 14 6 14 1 Method of Use The Version Display screen is displayed by operating the system menu as described below Ver 4 12 Select Expansion Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Version Display The system program s version information will be displayed as described below Press the Quit touch switch to exit the Version Display screen and return to the NT31C ST 143 E 3 Bystem program 123456789 123456789 Expansion Mode screen Version 4 00 e PT Model PT model number Date 2006 08 15 e System program System program name e Version System program version e Date Date program was created This screen is an example Actual screens will show the information specific to the PT and system program being used After checking the version information press the Quit touch switch to exit the Version Display screen and return to the Expansion Mode screen Reference e The PT model always shows the model number of the ivory model of the PT The B suffix will not be displayed even for black models e The system program s version number is also displayed in the upper right corner of the System Menu e The creation date does not always match the file date of the system pro gram installed with the System Installer 229 Version Display Section 6 14 230 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance This section describes the action to take when errors oc
90. screen with the previous settings still in effect 181 System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 10 Setting the Resume Function 182 Reference The NT31 NT31C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables even when the power to the NT31 NT31C is OFF and write back them to the host when the power is turned ON If the resume function is OFF the memory tables are initialized to these initial values on switching to the RUN mode If the resume function is ON these are not initialized and are kept the battery backed up contents When the memory table is initialized its contents are reset to the initial state that is set by the Support Tool When the system is started up the next time the screen is displayed using the previous contents of the memory table e ON The resume function is used e OFF The resume function is not used The default factory setting is OFF e When the voltage of the NT31 NT31C s built in battery becomes low the memory table contents cannot be retained even if ON is set for the resume function e For details on the resume record function refer to 2 15 3 Resume Func tion in the Reference Manual System Settings Section 6 9 Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Scre
91. speed 9600 bps Parity Even Xon Xoff control Not executed Communications method Full duplex Stop bits 2 stop bits Data length 7 bits CV series and CVM1 CV series EVi_ CPU Units e CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 e CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 PLC Setup When connecting to a CVM1 C V series CPU Unit set the following communi cations conditions for the Setup SettingatHot at SettingatHot Communicates speed speed Set the same speed as set at the NT31 NT31C Stop bit 2 stop bits Data length ASCII 7 bits w o o oS Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host 53 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 54 Link Method page 161 Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device e g SYSMAC sup port software or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU Unit For details on the PLC Setup refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV500 1000 2000 Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams W202 E1 L Setting the Front Switches oOo00000 e I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C System setting DIP SW4 To effect the existing DIP switch settings set SW4 to ON To effect the existing PLC Setup set I O port selector switch SW4 to OFF RS 232C T Note RS 422A For
92. supported differ depending on the host unit For details refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port Converting the Communications Type with an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter The following communications type conversions are possible by using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT AL001 E made by OMRON e RS 232C lt RS 422A e RS 232C RS 485 24 Method for Connection to the Host Section 2 1 Combinations of Communications Method and Connection Method The connection methods that can be used depending on the communications method used and the communications type for communications between the NT31 NT31C and the host are indicated in the table below Communi Usable Connection Method Usable Communications Method cations Type at Host RS 232C RS 232C An 1 1 connection im RS 232C max 15 m RS 422A RS 232C 1i ere via a convertor unit Convertor unit TI NT ALOO1 T ise 422A 232C max 500 m max 2 m Convertor unit NT ALO01 S 422A RS 232C total length 500 m max 2 m RS 422A ai 1 1 connection RS 422A max 500 m H 1 N connection RS 422A total length 500 m O Connection possible x Connection not possible 25 Method for Connection to the Host Section 2 1 Usable Connection Method Usable Communications Method RS 485 RS 232C 4 4 connection via a convertor unit PT Convertor unit Ll NT AL001 TT
93. switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 5 Setting the Printer Controller The NT31 NT31C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT31 NT31C Three types of printer can be connected to the NT31 NT31C select the type used with this memory switch setting e ESC P 173 System Settings Section 6 9 Printers that conform to Epson s ESC P 24 J83C color printer control specifications or printers that conform to Epson s ESC P 24 J82 monochrome control specifications e PC PR201H Printers that can emulate the PC PR201H made by NEC Corp e PCL 5 Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications Note that the NT31 can only be used with the monochrome Tone setting and does not support color printing For the NT31 the Print Method is fixed as Tone The default factory setting is ESC P Reference e In addition to this setting NT31C has the Print Method setting page 175 e For details on the print function refer to 2 15 7 Print Function in the Ref erence Manual Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation
94. the Memory Unit as follows Setting of SW2 4 not relevant Setting of SW2 3 not relevant Setting of SW1 4 not relevant In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors it is advisable to set SW2 1 and SW2 2 so as to disable writing to the PT from which the data is to be read Switch the NT31 NT31C power ON Display language select screen appears ATS IRL C CICS Select language Aa mis Japanese English 41 Using a Memory Unit 42 Reference Section 3 5 3 Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display lan guage The following descriptions are for when English is selected The screen shown below is displayed Memory Unit Manual Transmit Current FT Data System System Program WISic y OMRON Direct Access E 4 12 Screen Production line Screen current Memory Unit Data Bank System Program NTESiC OMRON Direct Accesst E 3 18 Bank 1 Shipping Operation Screen PT Screen Memory Unit Bank 1 Current PT Screen Data System The first line Compatible PT type for the system program inside PT The second line System program name and Version for the system pro gram inside PT The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program Current PT Screen Data Screen The comment for the screen data in the NT31 NT31C is displayed here Current Memory Unit Screen Data e In the case of system program The first line Compa
95. the System Installer Mode page 138 For details refer to 3 5 Using a Memory Unit Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 6 5 1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the display language is to be English or Japanese Select English or Japanese ATS we IRL TC TS From here on this manual assumes that Select language English has been selected here Aas mas Japanese English The System Installer mode menu is displayed Menu Exit System Instal ler If there is no system program or the system program has been corrupted Download System Program the message System Program not exist or incorrect is displayed at the bottom of the screen Change System Settings Erase Screen Data 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program Use this function when the system program of the NT31 NT31C has been cor rupted or when installing a new system program Reference e In order to install a system program the system installer must also be installed at the Support Tool The system installer is an accessory with the Support Tool NI ZJCAT1 EV4 When installing the Support Tool in a personal computer install the system installer also For details on the method for installing the system installer at the Support Tool side and the operating procedure refer to the NT series Support Tool Ver 4 _ for Win dows Operatio
96. the brightness Select System Menu Maintenance Mode I O Set tings Brightness Adjust Setting Using Special Screen During PT Operation You can set the brightness and contrast by displaying the screen with the fol lowing number using a touch switch with a switch screen function or by spec ifying the display screen in the PT status control area Screen number 9030 Brightness and contrast adjustment screen Contrast Adjustment The NT31 NT31C allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps The CON TRAST ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually checking the contrast on the screen Once the contrast has been set it remains in effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT31 NT31C is reset and even if the voltage of the built in battery becomes low Setting from the System Menu Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below 191 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MEND JI Select I O Set tings Memory Init Display Hisory Memory Switch Alarm History Select Contrast Adjust eto io A k STS y contrast can be controlled by IMM steps Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in the left half of the screen 2 Increase 10 steps A Increase 1 step V Decrease 1 step Decrease 10 steps Quit Press Quit
97. to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 Check the cable connection and perform a con ductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable Retransmit the data from the Support Tool 7 2 4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode of the NT31 NT31C and the remedies for these errors System Program not exist or incorrect e The system program has not been installed e The system program has been deleted due to a hardware fault or because the flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life Hardware fault or flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life Unable to erase System Program e A communications error occurred during downloading of the system program e legal data has been written into the screen data memory e Hardware fault or flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life Unable to download System Pro gram 238 Select Download System Program and download the system program 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program page 151 If this does not solve the problem contact your OMRON service center If the same message is displayed on repeating selection of Download System Program and attempting to delete the system progr
98. 00G 25 25 pin type In case O V is set for a Unit which has CTS setting selector it is not neces sary to shorten between RS and CS Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A CV500 CN228 9 pin lt 25 pin 2 m XW2Z S002 9 pin lt 9 pin 2 m Serial Port A Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram PLC Host link unit Nnoogd RS 232C interface 5 9 Serial Port B Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram 77 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 78 13 oooo0oo0oo0o000000 OOOO o0o0o0000Q N 14 25 NT31 NT31C number Connector Abbreviation hood RS 232C interface 25 pin type PLC Host link unit This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 422A 485 port of the PT 5 1 5 2 Connecting to the Hosts RS 232C Port si creer 0 0 cee 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 The Type of Host and Setini Seier teresa tap eE naaa RENN 1 1 Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the H st eeri goa oa nda 62 bee ea ek Swe OS oe bw ES 1 N Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C atthe Host 2 03424 oo40 462 50 neon Ko ote Rh 4 ax he OR Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port 2 0 0
99. 00HX Z C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C Series C1000H CPU01 EV1 C120 LK201 EV1 C1000H a E y NT Groat C200HS CPU01 03 21 23 31 33 E C200H LK201 EV1 C200HS C200HE CPU11 32 42 E C200HE C200HE CPU11 32 42 ZE C200HE Z C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HG C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 ZE C200HG Z C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C200HX C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 C200HX Z ZE C200HS CPU21 23 31 33 E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 C200HX CPU44 64 65 85 ZE CORS CPUE o OOOO O ZE C1000H CPU01 EV1 C500 LK201 EV1 C1000H ll C1000H CPU01 EV1 C500 LK203 C1000H F C1000HF CPU01 EV1 C2000H i i CPM1 10 20 30CDR L CPM1A 10 20 30 40CDL 1 L CPM2A 30 40 60CDLILI L CPM1 CIF0O1 Peripheral port connection CPM2C 10 20U 1 ILILILILI L 2 CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 EV1 CQM1H CPU11 21 51 61 3 CQM1H CPU51 61 CQM1H SCB41 CQM1H CPM2C CQM1 4 N Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 PLC Units with Built in Host Link CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Unit or Connect Series Function Host Link Units or Expansion Communications able to Communications Board Unit Board Unit CV CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 LK201 CV500 a CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 a CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 eos CVM1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CV500 LK201 CVM1 ae CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 4 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 Compo SRM1 C02 V1 Bus S Master Control Unit 1 This CPU Unit
100. 1 2 Rapid System Program amp Screen Data Changes Possible Using a Memory Unit Screen Data Check Function Increased Screen Data Capacity Large Increase in Maximum Number of Registered Elements Binary Data can be Read to Written from the Host Character Display Using High Definition Fonts Simple Version Upgrades Complies with International Standards Compatible with Other Vendors Devices Multiple Windows High speed 1 N NT Link Additional Mathematical Functions Device Monitor Function Interlock Function Improved Lamp Touch Switch Labels e Installing a Memory Unit model NT MF261 on the rear of the NT31 NT31C makes it easy to write screen data into the NT31 NT31C on site This enables a rapid response to setup changes e NT31 NT31C can store a system program into a Memory Unit This enables the system to handle more flexible setups Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NT31 NT31C system menu without connecting up to the Support Tool The data capacity of 1 MB is twice that of the NT30 NT30C enabling storage of a larger quantity of screen data The number of elements that can be registered on one screen has been con siderably increased making it possible to create more expressive screens For details refer to Display Restrictions in Appendix A Specifications of the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual It is now possible to write binary data stor
101. 1 CPU41 42 43 44 EV1 CQM1H CPU11 21 51 61 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H 84 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 C200HS CPU21 23 31 33 C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 SRM1 C02 V2 Usable Cables with Attached Connectors e For host link and 1 1 NT Link only 5 V power wire attached SJ45007 102 9 pin to 9 pin 0 7 m SJ45007 202 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m e For host link 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link 5 V power supplied from PLC XW2Z 070T 1 9 pin to 9 pin 0 7 m XW2Z 200T 1 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m SJ46006 102 9 pin to 9 pin 1 m SSJ46006 202 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m CVM1 CV series CPU Units whose model names do not have the suffix EVL cannot be connected by any connection method When connecting to the peripheral port of a CS CU series CPU Unit a CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable is required in addition to the above cables Supply power to the 5 V output of the NT ALOO1 from an external power supply when using this method 1 6 NT ALO01 side PLC side reviation nal connector RS 232C connector 9 7 pin type Shielding wire 9 pin type When there is no 5 V output at
102. 1C by using these numeral memory tables e For details on the clock function refer to 2 15 6 Clock Function in the Ref erence Manual e No clock data is set on shipment from the factory e The clock data is backed up by the built in battery of the NT31 NT31C If the battery voltage becomes low the clock data cannot be retained when the power to the NT31 NT31C is turned OFF or the NT31 NT31C is reset and the clock function will not operate correctly e When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for System Setting in the System Installer mode it is not possible to set the date and time Display set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below 195 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Select Calendar Check YUJI Memory Switch Alarm History Calendar Check 1 0 Check MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Press Set If you are just checking the display press Quit at this point the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen Set the date a Each of the digits of the year month date hour minute and second settings and the Jj8 GI 15 Fri day of the week setting are touch switches 1 A a press these touch switches to change the 1J8 J Js corresponding settings Press Quit The clock data is set and the NT31 NT31C fear Month Da returns to the date and time display ojs i G5 Fri
103. 2000 Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams W202 E1 L Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Setting the Front Switches e Host link communication method selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A oOo00c00 e Communications type setting DIP SW3 Set SW3 to OFF for host link communications m e Host link default value settings DIP SW4 To effect the existing DIP switch settings set SW4 to ON To effect the values set in the PLC Setup set SW4 to OFF Note For CPU Units manufactured before or during June 1995 lot No jj65 the existing DIP switch settings differ from the PLC Setup default values as follows Existing DIP switch settings 2 400 bps 1 stop bit even parity 7 bit data length PLC Setup default values 9 600 bps 2 stop bits even parity 7 bit data length For CPU Units manufactured from July 1995 onward lot No jj75 the stipulated values in the DIP switch settings also are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits I O port selector switch RS 232C RS 422A e Terminator setting DIP SW6 Set this switch to ON Set terminator ON C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1H or SRM1 The connection method depends upon the model of PLC being used as shown in the following table PLC model Connection method C200HX HG HE Z E_ Connect to the RS 422A port port A on a Communica tions Board CQM1H e Connect to the RS 422A port port 2 on a Serial C
104. 2A I O port selector switch RS 232C T RS 422A e O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A e Communications condition setting DIP SW1 Set this switch to OFF Communications are executed in accordance with the CPU Bus Unit system settings made at the PLC The initial values for the system settings are as follows Communications speed 9 600 bps Parity Even Xon Xoff control Not executed Communications method Full duplex Stop bits 2 stop bits Data length 7 bits L e Terminator setting selector switch Set this to ON CVM1 CV series EV_ CPU Units e CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 e CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 PLC Setup When connecting to a CVM1 C V series CPU Unit set the following communi cations conditions for the _ Setup SettingatHot at SettingatHot a speed Set the same speed as for the NT31 NT31C 7 Stop bit 2 stop bits Data length ASCII 7 bits w o o oS 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method page 161 Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device e g SYSMAC sup port software or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU Unit For details on the PLC Setup refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 C V500 CV1000 CV
105. 3 2 0524 0844 Main Monitor 44 0608 851 Sector 102 0612 1358 A Low Level 2 0612 1403 Main Monitor 45 614 851 Sector B E E gai Sart o A Press Quit emp Setting 44 0594 0841 Sector A The NT31 NT31C returns to the 32 0524 841 Temp Setting 1 DISPLAY HISTORY MENU screen 33 524 841 Temp Setting 2 34 524 841 Temp Setting 3 2 0524 844 Main Monitor 44 0608 0851 Sector 102 0612 1358 A Low Level 2 0612 1403 Main Monitor 45 614 851 Sector B Example Print out All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen Example Sort by occurrence from oldest record No Scrn YY MM DD HH MM Comment 01 01 1 1 98 01 12 10 21 Coolant Error 2 2 98 01 12 11 53 Motor Error 3 8 98 01 13 09 35 Compressor Error 4 2000 98 01 13 14 22 Emergency Stop 6 11 5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record 200 Reference The alarm history record function is a function that continually monitors dur ing operation the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit memory table and records the time when these bits come ON and the num ber of times they come ON The record data can be displayed and printed out at a printer connected to the NT31 NT31C by operation from the System Menu This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record data recorded in the NT31 NT31C Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence
106. 31 NT31C ON 2 Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool 3 Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below at the NT31 NT31C Transmitting the Screen Data Section 6 6 Ver 4 12 Select Transmit Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode TRANSMIT MODE MENU x Select Tool Transmit Tool Transmit 4 Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool then select Download NTST PT in the Support Tool s Connect menu and specify the data to be transmitted 5 During screen data transmission the transmission status is displayed 6 On completion of screen data transmission press the Quit touch switch The NT31 NT31C returns to the Transmit mode If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool use the communications check functions of the NT31 NT31C to check if com munications between the NT31 NT31C is normal or not page 214 Precautions to Be If any of the following or a system error occurs during transmission of screen Observed When data the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the NT31 Transmitting Screen Data NT31C If this happens the NT31 NT31C may not enter the RUN mode when started up or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure to dis play screens during operation In this case the screen data must be retrans mitted in file u
107. 32 Z E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 C series C200HE CPU42 Z E pin C200HE Z C200HG CPU34 Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 C series C200HG CPU43 pin C200HG Z E C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU63 C200HX CPU34 Z Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 C series C200HX CPU44 Z pin C200HX Z E C200HX CPU54 Z C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS series CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V 1 CS1G H D CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CJ series CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1G H M CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 1 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required 2 Either of the Communications Boards C2OOHW COM02 COM04 COM05 COMO6 EV1 is required CPU Units for Connection via a High speed NT Link 1 N Model Specification PLCTye CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS series CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V 1 CS1G H D CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CJ series CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CJ1G H M Reference CS series PLCs earlier than versions
108. 422A 485 Incorrect con nection may result in communications errors with the host Connecting the Ground Wire The PT has a functional ground terminal FG A 1 2 3 1 Ground according to Figure a for normal grounding e Connect the ground terminal GR of the devices to the functional ground FG A Make sure that each signal line is grounded at only one point and ground to 100 Q max e Short the LG terminal of the PLC to the ground terminal GR e Use a wire gauge of at least 2mm for the ground wire e Refer to the manual for individual Communications Units for details on proper wiring procedures 2 Do not ground the functional ground FG A of the PT if it is mounted to the same panel as devices that generate noise such as motors or invert ers aS shown in Figure b 128 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Figure a CPU Rack RS 422A 485 Signal line Preparing the Shield of RS 422A 485 Connectors Always prepare RS 422A 485 cable shields properly Otherwise communica tions errors may occur with the host Ground only one end of the shield when connecting the ground terminal GR of the devices to the functional ground FG A and grounding each signal line at only one point and to 100 Q max as shown in Figure a Ground both ends of the shield when not grounding the functional ground FG of the PT as shown in Figure b When using a CJU1M CIF11 alone or combin
109. 42H 43H 44H 45H e Peripheral port CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H 4 CS1D CPU66H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU1 1 12 13 21 22 23 1 The peripheral port Programming Console always has priority If a Pro gramming Console is connected later the Programming Console function of the NT31 NT31C is invalidated and operation from the NT31 NT31C becomes impossible 2 The CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable splits the PLC s Communications Port into a RS 232C port and a peripheral port 3 An RS 232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port An RS 232C adapter CPM1 CIF01 is required 4 The RS 232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port An RS 232C converting cable CS1W CN118 is required Reference Note that the Programming Console function cannot be used with CPM1 CQM1 and C200HX HG HE PLCs of the following lot numbers CPM1 LILILI5 LILI 6 220 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 where is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y CQM1 OLIS WLIL4 OLIS LILI 6 where is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y C200HX HG HE LILILI5 LILI 6 where is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y 6 12 2 Connection Method CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE ZE or SRM1 CPM1 or CPM2A CPM2C CS CJ Series The connection method is e
110. 4H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H See note C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE 85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 61 Note A Serial Communications Board cannot be used 1 14 RS 232C 422A 485 connector OOOWOOOOO0O0G O O O O O O O O O O O 25 pin type NT31 NT31C side PLC CPU Unit side RS 422A connector 9 pin type Next PT For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 5 2 6 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS 422A 485 When making an RS 422A 485 connecting cable as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below When using the memory link method however use a connector that matches with the RS 422A port at the CPU Unit CP Some Units come supplied with one connector and connector hood 126 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Check the required parts and prepare them in advance Connector XM2A 0901 9 pin type Delivered with the following Units Made by OMRON _ CS CJ series CPU Units C series C200HS CPU Units C200HX HG HE Z CPU Units CVM1 CV series CPU Units CV500 LK201 Connector XM2S 0911 9 pin type Delivered with the following Units hood Made by OMRON C series C200HS CPU Units C200HX HG HE Z CPU Units CVM1 CV series CPU Units CV500 LK201 XM2S 0
111. 7 Special features 249 Starting operation 169 Starting the NT31 NT31C 133 Storage ambient temperature 247 Support Tool 283 Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode 139 Switching to the RUN mode 169 System configuration 15 System Installer Mode 135 System Menu 135 T Terminal resistance setting terminal 93 Transmit Mode 135 291 Index Transmitting the screen data 155 Transporting and storing the NT31 NT31C 265 U Usable systems programming console function 220 Using a Memory Unit NT31 NT31C with V1 36 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter 259 V Vibration resistance operating 247 W Warning label 28 Waterproofed 4 Weight 247 292 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No V062 E1 05 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revisioncode Date Revised content July 2000 Original production 02 January 2003 Page 73 Description on connections added under Connecting to CS1 series CPU Units Page 185 Setting range of 0 to 10 seconds corrected to 1 to 10 seconds under Set ting the Time out Interval and 00 deleted from the sequence in the bottom graphic Page 224 Description on error display under Reference changed Page 235 One row about the numeral display or numeral input field a
112. 911 E 9 pin type Delivered with the following Units Made by JAE CS CJ series CPU Units Cable TKVVBS4P 03 Tachii Electric Wire Co Ltd 1 25 N3A Japan Solderless Recommended wire size fork type Terminal MFG AWG22 to AWG18 Y1 25 3 5L Molex Inc 0 3 to 0 75 mm fork type The terminal screws of the RS 422A adaptor CPM1 CIF11 are M3 specifica tion When wiring use crimp terminals for M3 use Tighten terminal screws with a tightening torque of 0 5 N m Use the same specification of the terminal screws which is used in the relay terminal block Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring Examples of applicable terminals Fork type Round type 6 2 mm max 6 2 mm max O 5 2 7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications The serial port B connector of the NT31 NT31C has a terminal resistance set ting terminal TRM In RS 422A 485 communications a terminal resistor must be set at the device at the end of the communications cable but not at any other device The NT31 NT31C has a built in terminal resistor and whether or not the ter minal resistance is applied is set by the wiring at the terminal resistance set ting terminals pins No 9 and 10 of serial port B The terminal resistance is 120 Q When carrying out RS 422A 485 communications using serial port B short between terminals No 9 and 10 at the NT31 NT31C at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Leave terminals No 9 and 10 open at N
113. A communications methods ost link unit CPU Serial port B SYSMAC RS 422A 485 CS Cu series PLC 25 pin type C series PLC CVM1 CV series PLC SRM1 RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT ALOO1 9 pin connector or 25 pin connector 25 pin connector Ai RS 422A 485 cable RS 232C cable max length 500 m with connectors RS 422A terminal block 9 pin connector Reference When using RS 485 as a port for the NT31 NT31C only NT link 1 N method standard or high speed can be used 82 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connecting an NT31 NT31C and NT AL001 RS 422A NT31 NT31C Host NT ALOO1 RS 422A NT31 NT31C side Shielding wire 8 6 4 2 WOIN PAQA RS 422A terminal OOOoCo0o0oo0o0o0o00Q O O O O O O O O O O O O 25 pin type For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 Connecting an NT31 NT31C and NT ALO01 RS 485 NT31 NT31C NT AL001 Host NT31 NT31C side Abbreviation Pin number onnector FG Re hood ow 8 6 4 2 RS 232C 422A 485 WOIN Cee Oo D connector o 2 s Ce O o O Cee om aw e T OG O 6 ie a O 9 a fe O 9 a fe O gt Prova
114. Adapter is connected to a C200HX HG HE ZE CQM1H CS CJ series OMRON PLC as an RS 422A device set DIP switches SW1 5 and SW1 6 as indicated below SW1 5 SW1 6 OFF ON 5 6 262 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter Appendix C Pin Arrangement The Adapter has a terminal block for an RS 422A 485 interface connection and a connector for an RS 232C interface connection The pin arrangements for the RS 422A 485 terminal block and the RS 232C connector are as follows RS 422A 485 Terminal Block Terminal Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction ae pin Adapter RS 422 device Reqestio send 0 68 S zo Requestiosend eeo po e pemo oa OOOO Resvea Pe eoo eo seman 808 e emm p08 o eooo Signal ground leceo k o Funatonal gourd E E The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications l l 8 6 4 2 t QPO l r l RS 232C Connector Connector Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction pin No Adapter lt RS 232C device C a 2 Send data E E e esea o wooo pp 4 Request to send RS lt shorted to CS internally O A O N OO 0 0 0 O O O O O O ON O Clear to send shorted to RS internally 5 V 150 mA input for Adapter Data set ready shorted to ER internally Data terminal ready shorted to DR internally Signal ground The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS 422A terminal block 263 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Ad
115. C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 165 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 5 Setting the Memory Link Method 166 Set the communications conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below Check the communications settings of the host to be used Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Select Memory Switch Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Sereen Data Diep Calendar Check Display the fourth memory switch screen by lt MEMORY SWITCH gt l pressing the J next screen or T Wait Time sec previous screen touch switch CO ja cj w d e Fj s T Z T Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF Controller ESC P Print Method Tone lt MEMORY SWITCH j Press the touch switch corresponding to the 4 4 Zit port at which the memory link method is to be set Comm A Method or Comm B Comm A Method Host Link Method to display the setting option Comm B Select RS 2326 Memory Link The setting option changes each time the touch switch is press
116. C200HE CPU32 Z E 4 C200H i E Z E C200HE CPU42 Z E 4 C200HG CPU48 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200H Seen rere C200HG CPU43 Z E 4 eu C200HG CPU53 Z E 4 C200HG CPU63 Z E4 C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E4 C200H eel eae eae Ga C200HX CPU44 Z EC pie C200HX CPU65 ZE Co00HX CPUS4 Z EC C200HX CPU85 ZE C200HX CPU64 Z E4 C200HX CPU65 ZE 4 C200HX CPU85 ZE 4 CQM1H CPUS51 CQM1H CQM1H CPU61 CompoBus SRM1 C02 V2 SRM1 S Master Control Unit T A CS1W SCB21 V1 or CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board or CS1W prope V1 Serial Nauka a Unit is required 2 A CS1W SCU21 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required A CS1W SCB21 V1 or CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board cannot be used 3 A CJ1W SCU21 V1 or CU1W SCU41 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required 65 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 66 Reference 4 One of the following Communications Boards is required C200HW COM02 COM04 COM05 COM06 E V 1 5 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required With version 1 V1 and high speed versions H of the CS series CPU Units and any versions of the CJ series CPU Units the high speed 1 N NT Link method can be used as well as the standard 1 N NT Link method Furthermore the high speed 1 N NT Link can be used in earlier versions of CS series CPU Units pre version 1 and non high speed by installing a new version of a
117. CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit CS CJ series Rack mounting Units CS1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 and port 2 are both RS 422A 485 ports CJ1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 and port 2 are both RS 422A 485 ports CJ1W SCU41 V1 The port 1 is an RS 422A 485 port Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit using the rotary switches on the front of the Unit Set the number or symbol in the setting dis play window in the following way using a flat blade screwdriver When using a CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit set the switches as shown below 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A or 2 wire RS 485 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled DM Area Allocation Settings From the Programming Device i e a Programming Console or CX Program mer write the settings directly to the CPU Unit s DM Area Setup Area After the settings have been written they will be enabled when the power supply is cycled the Unit is restarted the communications port is restarted or a STUP instruction is executed The DM Area words that are allocated and the contents of the settings are given in the following table m DM 30000 100 x unit number Allocated DM Area words Setting Contents 0000 to 0009 1 Baud rate standard m 16 000L The
118. CTION 2 Preparing for Connection This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs and the functions of the parts of PTs as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices 2 1 Method for Connection to the Host 0 00 cee eee eee 24 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 0 ccc eee eee teen ene 27 23 Method for Connection to the Host Section 2 1 2 1 Method for Connection to the Host This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the NT31 NT31C and the relationship between the connection method and the communications method NT31 NT31C Communications Ports and Communications Methods The NT31 NT31C has two communications ports Their uses are indicated in the table below Usable communications methods Communications type port Serial port A Host link RS 232C NT link 1 1 NT link 1 N Memory link Support Tool connection bar code reader input function Serial port B Host link RS 232C NT link 1 1 RS 422A 485 NT link 1 N select between RS 232C l and RS 422A 485 Memory link 1 There are two NT Link 1 N communications rates standard and high speed Communications Methods That Can Be Used with the Host The following communications methods can be used with the hosts that can be connected to the NT31 NT31C e RS 232C e RS 422A e RS 485 The communications types that are actually
119. CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit CV500 LK201 has two connectors com munications ports 1 and 2 To use the RS 422A type host link method set communications port 2 to RS 422A Communications port 2 is a 9 pin connector which allows selection of the RS 232C or RS 422A method When this port is used with the RS 422A method the I O port selector switch on the front of the Unit must be set to RS 422A the lower position CPU Bus Unit Settings When connecting to a CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit set the following com munications conditions for the CPU Bus Unit settings TL Party 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method page 161 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT31 NT31C in a single host link Set the CPU Bus Unit settings directly from a Programming Device e g SYS MAC support software For details on the CPU Bus Unit settings refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit Operation Manual W205 E1 L 101 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting to a CPU Unit 102 Setting the Front Switches e Unit SW3 SW4 Set these switches to 0 Communications port 1 RS 232C Communications port 2 RS 232C RS 42
120. Check IEVICE CHECK MENU I CHECK MENU Select Buzzer Check DEVICE Buzzer Check Touch Switch LCD Check Back light Check e If the buzzer functions correctly it will sound continuously At this time the Buzzer Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video e To stop the buzzer while it is sounding press the Buzzer Check touch switch again System Maintenance Section 6 11 Checking the RUN LED Check if the RUN LED functions normally Check the RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode AINTENANCE MODE MENU Select I O Check Select Device Check I F Check Device Check Select LED Check wit Sereen menory screen Memory 2 Touch Switch e If the RUN LED is functioning normally it will operate as follows At this time the LED Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video Lit in green OFF lit in red OFF lit in green e To end the LED check press the LED Check touch switch on the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen again 207 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Checking the LCD Screen Check if the LCD screen display functions normally by following the menu Display operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode TENANCE MODE MENU Select I O Check Select Device Check I F Check Device Check Select LCD Check wit Screen tenors screen Memory Buzzer check Touch Switch Touch Switch
121. Dedicated connector Note Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA before using the 5 V output of pin No 6 The 5 V output of the PT delivers 5 V 5 and 250 mA maximum Programming Environment ltem eee Programming System Programming support software Programming Tool Programming support software NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 L by OMRON Special Features pote Specifications Buzzer Three kinds of buzzer sound continuous short intermittent and long intermittent ON On reception of a command from the host display of a screen with a buzzer setting or display of an error screen such as for a receive error OFF On reception of a command from the host or display of a screen with no buzzer setting Setting Set ON for Buzzer Sound in the memory switch menu or set ERROR ON for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input Touch switch input sound Touch switches Input sound Sounding for 0 2 seconds Setting Set ON for Key Press Sound in the memory switch menu Maintenance function Memory switch setting Self test functions such as for the memory and external interface Setting condition confirmation function Communications check function Initialization of internal memory data Display of display alarm history data Registered data test display functi
122. E m e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N HAHAHAHHA sws e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled e CTS selection DIP SW3 1 and SW3 2 Set SW3 1 to ON 1 and SW3 2 to OFF 0 Set this always to 0 V e Synchronization DIP SW3 3 to SW3 6 Set SW3 3 and SW3 5 to ON 1 and SW3 4 and SW3 6 to OFF 0 Set these to Internal Connecting to a CVM1 CV CVM1 CV series Rack mounting Unit CV500 LK201 Series Host Link Unit A CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit CV500 LK201 has two connectors com munications ports 1 and 2 Either of these ports can be used for connection to an NT31 NT31C by the RS 232C method However since the connectors at these ports are of different types a cable that matches the connector must be prepared e Communications port 1 Communications port 1 is a 25 pin connector for RS 232C use only e Communications port 2 Communications port 2 is a 9 pin connector which allows selection of the RS 232C or RS 422A method When this port is used with the RS 232C method the I O port selector switch on the front of the Unit must be set to RS 232C the upper position CPU Bus Unit Settings When connecting to a CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit set the following com munications conditions for the CPU Bus Unit settings em Setting at Host Communications speed Set the same speed as set at the NT31 N
123. E CPU1 1 32 42 ZE C200HG C200HG ZE C200HX C200HX ZE C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 ZE C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 ZE C200HE CPU32 42 E C200HW COM03 _ C200HE C200HE CPU32 42 ZE 06 EV1 C200HE ZE C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HG C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C200HX C1000H CPU01 EV1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C1000H a NN Com C1000H CPU01 EV1 C500 LK203 C1000H O merone com CPM1 10 20 30CDR L1 CPM1 CPM1A 10 20 30 40CDLI LI CPM1 CIF11 CPM2A 30 40 60CDL I _1 CPM2A CPM1 ClIF11 Peripheral port connection CPM2C 10 CPM2C 20000000 0 L CQM1H CPU51 61 CQM1H SCB41 CV Series CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 LK201 9 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CV500 LK201 CVM1 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 PEE O r F CPM1 CIF11 1 This CPU Unit is for a Duplex CPU Unit System The CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Communications Board cannot be used 2 Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect 3 CPU Units of CVM1 CV series PLCs without the suffix EVO cannot be connected The host link method cannot be used when an NT31 NT31C is connected using RS 485 To use the host link method connect by RS 422A 9 N Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Settings at the Host When using the RS 422A type host link method the settings shown below must be made at the host de
124. Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the expansion functions supported by the NT31 NT31C The follow ing expansion functions are supported e Version Display Displays the version of system program the date it was cre ated and the PT model For details refer to 6 74 Version Dis play e Programming Console Function Allows the NT31 NT31C to be used as a Programming Con sole for a CS CJU series PLC CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z or SRM1 For details refer to 6 72 Programming Console Function e Device Monitor Function Allows the NT31 NT31C to change the PLC s operating mode and display change the contents of words in a CS CU series PLC CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z or SRM1 For details refer to 6 73 Device Monitor Function in this manual or 2 16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual Functions of the System The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode Installer Mode e Setting the display language e Clearing and installing system programs e Disabling enabling display of the System Menu e Disabling enabling writing to the screen data memory e Clearing screen data For details on these functions refer to 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode 136 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 6 3 2 Menu Tree The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT31 NT31C to be exe cuted by using touch switches displayed on th
125. Hex When connecting PT with its model number 0 2 5 to the built in RS 232C port for example set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH and 0005 Hex to 166CH Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device Programming Con sole or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device CX Pro grammer to the CPU Unit For details on the PLC Setup refer to the CS series Operation Manual W339 or the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W393 Setting the Front Switches Set the CPU Unit s DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31 NT31C is connected to An example of a CS series CPU Unit is shown below 67 68 Peripheral port This is used mainly for connection to the Programming Device This also supports the RS 232C unit connection RS 232 port This is used mainly for connection to the RS 232C unit Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 O RUN O ERR ALM O INH PRPHL COMM omrRon i DIP switches inside the battery storage Y OPEN e Set SW4 to ON establishing communications in MCPWR ll E BUSY accordance with PLC Setup when connecting the NT31 NT31C to the peripheral port e Set SW5 to OFF establishing communications in accordance with PLC Setup when connecting the NT31 NT31C to the RS 232C port This also supports the CX Programmer Connecting to C
126. INTENANCE MODE MENU Select Screen Data Disp Calendar Check 1 0 Check Specify the screen to be displayed in the input field in the middle of the screen Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated Heoi of Lans7Touh W i ON and keys Display of Memory Table No OFF Display of image Library No ON Set Display of Broken Line Frame OFF lt SCREEN DATA CHECK gt Press Set Screen No Display of Lamp Touch SW No ON Display of Memory Table No OFF Display of image Library No ON Display of Broken Line Frame OFF Press the touch switches to specify the display method in each case Display of Lam eee Touch SW No ON The setting option changes each time a Display of touch switch is pressed i Lana Table No OFF p Display of Image Library No ON Display of Broken Line Frame OFF System Maintenance lt SCREEN DATA CHECK gt Screen No Display of Lamp Touch SW No Display of Memory Table No OFF Display of image Library No ON Display of Broken Line Frame OFF BOILER OPERATION T 015003 T 015301 RUN STOP ERROR L 020000 L 020005 L 020013 Start Stop Error Confirmation Confirmation Occurrence T 016312 BOILER OPERATION T 015003 T 015301 RUN STOP ERROR L 020000 L 020005 L 020013 Start Stop Error Confirmation Occurrence T 016312 Section 6 11 Press Quit to return to the screen number selection screen Touching the top or bottom o
127. In addition some C200HX HG HE Z E PLCs can be connected using the host link method by installing a Communications Board With the CPM2A and CPM2C an RS 422A type of 1 1 NT Link can be cre ated through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Check the model and series of the PLC and the type of the installed Board or Unit before making a connection The Host Units featuring the RS 422A 485 host link function that can be con nected to the RS 422A 485 port of the NT31 NT831C are listed in the table below PLC CPU Unit with built in Host CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Unit or Connectable Series Link Host Link Units or Expansion Com Communications to munications Board Unit Board Unit CS Series CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 CS1G CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 CS1W SCU31 V1__ CS1H CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1D CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ Series CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1W SCU31 V1 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1W SCU41 V1 CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU1 1 12 13 21 22 23 96 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 PLC CPU Unit with built in Host CPU Units Connectable with Host Link Unit or Connectable Series Link Host Link Units or Expansion Com Communications to munications Board Unit Board Unit C Series C1000H CPU01 EV1 3G2A6 LK202 EV1 C1000H C2000H CPU01 EV1 C2000H C200HS CPU01 03 21 23 31 33 E C200H LK202 V1 C200HS C200HS CPU01 21 EC C200HE C200HE CPU11 32 42 E C200HE ZE C200H
128. It also describes how to download a system program to a PT using the System Installer The NT series Support Tool for Windows is normally referred to as merely the Support Tool Connecting to Controllers Not Made by OMRON e PLC Connection Manual V042 E1 L The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series Mitsubishi A Series and FX Series This manual describes the connection and setup methods for these controllers The NtT series Support Tool for Windows Version 4 Ll is required to connect the NT31 and NT31C PTs to these controllers e NT31 NT631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual VO60 E1 L The NT31 and NT31C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series Allen Bradley SLC 500 Series GE Fanuc 90 20 and 90 30 Series and Siemens S7 300 and S7 400 Series This manual describes the connection and setup methods for these controllers Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS
129. LC s memory areas The present val ues PVs of several words can be listed with the device monitor PT operations and inputs can be disabled from the PLC if interlock bits have been allocated in the PLC for the corresponding PT touch switches numeric inputs or string inputs The following displays can be performed with lamp or touch switch labels e Display several lines of labels e Switch the display between different labels when OFF and ON Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 NT30 NT30C and NT620S NT620C NT625C Emulation Additional CS CJ series Data Areas Accessible Recipe Function Adjusting Contrast and Brightness During PT Operation e Display the numeral memory table contents as labels e Display the string memory table contents as labels The word configuration of the PT status control area and PT status notify area can be set to emulate those of the NT30 NT30C or NT620S NT620C NT625C this mode is called NT30 620 compatible mode When the PT is operating in NT30 620 compatible mode it will be equivalent to an NT30 NTS30C or NT620S NT620C NT625C in the functions listed below The PT retains full V2 functionality in all functions other than the ones listed below Refer to Appendix C in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programma ble Terminal Reference Manual for more details e Word configuration and functions of the PT status control area and PT status notify area e Image library codes e Insertion of image l
130. LIL CJ1G H CPULILJH The PT is connected to the built in RS 232C port on the CPU Unit It can also be connected to the peripheral port on the CPU Unit but a CS1W CN118 Peripheral Port Connecting Cable must be used Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Connect to the built in RS 232C port on the CPU Unit or to an RS 232C port on a Communications Board A special Peripheral Port Connecting Cable CS1W CN118 can be used to connect to the peripheral port PLC Setup When connecting to a CS CJ series CPU Unit set the following communica tions conditions for the PLC Setup in accordance with the communications port to be used Using the CPU Unit s Built in RS 232C Port Word Writing Value 160 8200 NT link 1 N mode 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate standard 166 OO0O0L The largest model number of the con nected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex Using the CPU Unit s Peripheral Port Word Writing Value semings Y 8200 NT link 1 N mode 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate standard 000L1 The largest model number of the con nected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009
131. M2C CQM1 CQM1H other than the CPU11 or SRM1 Built in RS 232C port connection wora a witing Value ings DM6645 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communications conditions set by the contents of DM 55 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 56 Word Writing Value sewn SSCS DM6646 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps DM6648 0000 Unit 00 C200HX HG HE Z E Serial Communications Board port A CQM1H Serial Communications Board port 1 Word Writing Vaie Sens O DM6555 0001 Host link mode no CTS control ree OOt eStmeatone conto sty ho cot of OM DM6556 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps OM6558 C200HX HG HE Z E Serial Communications Board port B Word Writing Vae Setins DM6550 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communications conditions set by the contents of DM DM6551 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps DM6553 0000 Unit 00 CPM1 Peripheral port connection through a CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter Word writing Value sens SSCS DM6650 0001 Hos
132. Memory Unit and the type of PT must correspond 4 Press Execute The data is transmitted The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played in accordance with the progress of data transmission At the same time the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of the number of bytes and blocks 1 bank 16 block 1024k byte When the data transmission is operated manually RUN LED remains OFF 5 Switch the NT31 NT31C power OFF remove the Memory Unit then switch the NT31 NT31C power back ON If an error occurs when using the Memory Unit the NT31 NT31C operates as follows e The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from one to the other When the manual data transmission is operating the content of error and remedial action are shown with selected language When the automatic transmission is operating it is displayed in Japanese e The continuous buzzer sounds e The RUN LED flashes If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission it is pos sible to return to the Memory Unit manual transmission screen by pressing the OK touch switch but in the case of other errors the status described above remains in effect until the NT31 NT31C power is turned OFF or reset The system program for each model of PT is given in the following table NT31 System program for NT31 N
133. NT31 and NT31C Programmable Terminals Setup Manual NT31 and NT31C Programmable Terminals Setup Manual Revised October 2010 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Control
134. O O Din 4 2 g oO ojd 02 ES nn iw 9 pin type Shielding wire N 2 25 a NN eN gt wo 25 pin type For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 Wiring When Connecting a CVM1 CV series CPU Unit Applicable Units CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EVL1 CVM1 CPU11 EVL CVM1 CPU21 EVL CVM1 CV series CPU Units whose model names do not have the suffix EV cannot be connected by any connection method 118 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port ooooo0oo0o000000 OOOO o0o0o0000Q y 5 2 3 Direct Connection between RS 485 Ports at Both Units 25 NT31 NT31C side b Corrector 2 3 4 RS 232C 422A 485 connector 5 RDB connector SDB 1 1 gt ion a z lt a 3 3 15 16 RDA 2 3 a i p o 25 pin type 9 pin type il Shielding wire Section 5 2 For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 Wiring for a Memory Link Connection Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram 1 O O O O O O O O O O O 14 NT31 NT31C side OOOO o0o0o0000Q E cs 25 pin type Host SIUE RS 422A connector For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8
135. OMRON 3G2A5 LK201 EV 1 C200H LK201 V1 DB C2 J9 25 pin type 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 pee iteopine _fecanetxcoveh Cable AWG28x5P Multi core shielded cable IFVV SB e gil CO MA VV SB Multi core shielded cable SEONG Medobytiacnui Cables with Connectors Made by OMRON When connecting an NT ALOO1 and a PLC use the OMRON cables with con nectors indicated in the table below Model Cable Length Connector Specification XW2Z 070T 1 9 pin lt gt 9 pin 2m XW2Z 200T 1 Host link NT link 1 1 NT link 1 N 5 V power supplied from PLC Use when the PLC has a 5 V output 1 The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N Do not ex ceed this load 2 After connecting a connecting cable always tighten the connector Screws Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Recommended connectors cables and crimp terminals for RS 422A 485 When making an RS 422A 485 connecting cable as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below Some Units come supplied with one connector and connector hood Check the required parts and prepare them in advance Connector XM2A 2501 25 pin type Delivered with the following Units Made by OMRON C500 LK203 DB 25P F N 25 pin type Delivered with the following Units Made by JAE 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 nel 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Connector XM2S 2511 25 pin type Delivered with the following Units DB C2 J9 25 pin type Delivered with the following Units
136. ON time order and sort by frequency order of number of times the bits have come ON e With the NT31 NT31C the record data can also be displayed by register ing an alarm history display element on the screen e For details on the alarm history record function refer to 2 15 2 Alarm His tory Record Function in the Reference Manual e The order of display for sort by occurrence display from oldest record or from newest record is set with the Hist Disp Method memory switch page 180 e The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the Printer Controller page 173 and Print Method page 175 memory switches System Maintenance Section 6 11 Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu opera tion from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode TSYSTEM MENU MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Select Alarm Histo ry 170 Settings Sereen Data Diep Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Frequency Sort by Occurrence Sort by Frequency A Comment If necessary select the next or previous 1 524 441 Conveyor Stoppe i gt 9604 806 Temp Low Leyal screen by pressing i next screen or 3 0524 0841 Proccess 2 Stopped T previous screen 4 0524 841 Proccess 1 Stopped 24 i Conveyor Stopped The p screen to the left shows a ow Voltage pe ee display for the sort by occurrence method 9 0527 1125 Temp Low Level fro
137. PLC This allows PT memory and the display elements of the NT31 NT31C to make a quasi direct connection By sending a command for the memory link the host can make the NT31 NT31C execute processes through PT memory Fre quently used commands are kept handy for read and write tasks of the numeral memory table character string memory table and bit memory table 19 Communications Using Memory Links Section 1 5 Direct connection RS 232C 422A communications L S In the memory link method the only difference is that the NT31 NT31C finds its communications target inside instead of outside In the memory link method therefore change of the target is all that is needed to be capable of using the exact screen data that is acquired by the direct connection With the NT31 NT31C the Support Tool must be used to convert the data to screen data for the memory link When compared to the direct connection of the host link or NT link methods the memory link method has some restrictions regarding the use of some functions as described below e The Programming Console and Device Monitor functions cannot be used e The following strobes of PT status notify bits do not turn ON page 7 to 27 Screen switching strobe Numerals input strobe Character string input strobe e The usable area for allocation is the PT memory only 1 5 2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link The major differences between the direct connection and t
138. Port A Received Data FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF e If communications with the Support Tool is normal data transmitted from the Support Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the NT31 NT31C After confirming the result of the test press Quit The NT31 NT31C returns to the I F CHECK MENU screen Check communications at the serial ports A B Check Screen The check screen and check method differ according to the communications method set for the port to be checked For Host Link Example Serial port A while using the host link lt Comm Port A gt Check the setting of memory SW and the PLC and connect the PT to the PLC with the Comm Port A Execute Execute sending Data FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF Received Data FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF Press Execute to start the check The data for checking communications is sent to the host and is displayed as the Sending Data in hexadecimal e If communications with the host is normal the reply from the host is dis played at Received Data in hexadecimal e f a communications error occurs while checking the communications con ditions with the host a communications error screen is displa
139. Replaceable backlight 285 Replacement battery 286 Replacing the backlight 242 Replacing the battery 243 Reset switch 28 RS 232C adaptor 283 RS 232C RS 422A Adapter 81 283 RS 422A adaptor 283 RUN 135 RUN LED 27 RUN mode 135 S Screen data composition and transmission units 156 Screen data memory check 209 Selecting menu items 139 Serial Communications Board 46 65 70 Serial Communications Unit 46 Serial port A 16 24 Serial port A connector 28 Serial port B 16 24 Serial port B connector 28 Set 162 Setting Screen Saver Movement 176 Setting the Buzzer Sound 172 Setting the Key Press Sound 171 Setting the Print Method 175 Setting the Printer Controller 173 Setting the Start up Wait Time 171 Setting the automatic reset function 184 Setting the bar code reader input function 189 Setting the communications type for serial port B 168 Setting the conditions for communications with the memory link method 159 Setting the display language in the System Installer mode 151 Setting the history display method 180 Setting the host link method 161 Setting the Memory Link Method 166 Setting the NT link 1 1 method 163 Setting the NT link 1 N method 164 Setting the resume function 182 Setting the retry count 187 Setting the screen saver start up time 178 Setting the terminal resistance 93 127 Setting the time out interval 186 Shock resistance operating 24
140. Retry Counts setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re establish communications If communications cannot be recovered within this number of attempts the following happens depending on the setting made for the Comm Auto return memory switch page 184 e Comm Auto return ON Operation in the RUN mode is continued without displaying an error screen Regardless of the setting made for Retry Counts attempts to re establish communications are repeated until normal communica tions is achieved e Comm Auto return OFF The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed On pressing the OK touch switch on the error screen the screen displayed imme diately before is redisplayed and attempts are made to re establish communications The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously The setting range is 0 to 255 times The default factory setting is 5 times For details on communications errors refer to 7 2 5 Communications Errors and Their Remedies page 239 187 System Settings 188 Section 6 9 Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History I 0 Settings Screen Data Diep Calendar Check Press J next screen or T previous
141. S 232C cable max 2 m RS 485 cable max total length Je LI One end of the wire must always be connected to the host PLC and there must be no branching Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays and communications failures lt PLC NT31 NT31C NT31 PLC Relay terminal block NT31 NT31C NT31 PLC At termination Relay terminal block Max 2 NT31C NT31 Not at Not at NT31 termination termination Not at termination i NT31 At termination Example of Good Connection Examples of Bad Connections CS CJ series CPU Units cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT link method Use the 1 N connection NT Link method standard or high speed in stead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT link 1 N method page 64 or Using the High speed NT link 1 N method page 69 The Type of Host and Settings The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS 232C and the host side RS 232C For the available type and settings of the host refer to the pages listed below Method Reference Host link Host Link Method page 46 NT link 1 1 NT Link 1 1 method page 61 NT link 1 N Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 64 High speed NT link 1 N Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 69 Me
142. S MENU Quit Contrast Adjust page 191 Brightness Adjust page 193 O CHECK MENU Quit I F Check Device Check DISPLAY HISTORY MENU EXPANSION ail Sort by Occurrence page 198 Sort by Frequency page 198 I F CHECK MENU Quit Tool Comm page 214 Comm Port A page 215 Comm Port B page 215 Printer page 218 DEVICE CHECK MENU Quit Buzzer Check page 206 LED Check page 207 LCD Check page 208 Backlight Check page 209 Screen Memory page 209 Touch Switch page 211 Battery page 213 MODE MENU Quit Version Display page 228 Programming Console Function page 219 Device Monitor Function page 225 ALARM HISTORY MENU Quit Sort by Occurrence page 200 Sort by Frequency page 200 137 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu Calling the System Menu Reference Reference Calling the System Installer Mode 138 This section describes how to use the menus including how to call the Sys tem Menu how to call the System Installer mode and how to select menu items The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods e Touching the corners of the touch panel e Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu e If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the Sys tem Installer mode the System Menu cannot be displayed this does not apply if an error
143. S series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS 232C port for CS series CPU Units CS1W SCB21 V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 See note Note Cannot be used with the CS1D CPU65H CPU67H CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or execu tion of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown Allocated DM Area words Baan Setting Contents DM32000 DM32010 8200 NT link 1 N mode DM32001 DM32011 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate stan dard DM32006 DM32016 O000L 1 The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex When connecting PTs with model numbers 3 to 6 to port 1 for example set the value 8200 Hex to DM32000 0000 Hex to DM32001 and 0006 Hex to DM32006 Connecting to CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit CS CJ series Rack mounting Unit CS1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Usi
144. SEC TION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on con necting to the PLC 227 Version Display Section 6 14 6 13 3 Method of Use Reference The Device Monitor screen is displayed by operating the system menu as described below Ver 4 12 Select Expansion Mode SYSTEM MENU J Transmit Mode Select Device Monitor An error message will be displayed if the wrong communications protocol is selected Programm ing Conso le The Device Monitor screen is displayed Stop Device Moni tor Registered Display amp Change Monitor Channel Data Display Channel onitor Data List Display PLC Error Information Information List When an error screen is displayed the system menu can be displayed by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously The Check touch switch on the screen can also be used to display the system menu but it will not work unless the cause of the error has been removed If the system menu is not displayed when the Check touch switch is pressed press two of the four corners of the touch panel to return to the system menu For more details on operations of the Device Monitor function refer to 2 16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual 6 14 Version Display 228 Use the Version Display function to check the version of the NT31 NT31C s system program The Version Display screen shows the model creation date and version of the system
145. SS O NT CNT121 Printer cable for half pitch 1 5 m made by OMRON Cable for Peripheral Port of CS CJ series PLC o Moa f Specification OO O CS1W CN118 Made by OMRON CS series peripheral port lt gt D Sub 9 pin female Connecting Cable for the CPM2C Communications Connector Specification CPM2C CN111 Made by OMRON CPM2C communications port lt gt D Sub 9 pin female C series periph eral port 284 Appendix K Option List Replaceable Backlight NT31C CFLO1 Used for NT31 ST1211_ EV2 NT31C ST141 _ EV2 Only This is a backlight CFL unit for replacement purposes Protective Sheet NT30 KBA04 Used for Both NT31 NT31C Stuck to the display to prevent irregular reflection or contamination The entire sheet is colorless and transpar ent The five sheets make a set Option List Appendix K Chemical resistant Cover NT30 KBA01 Covers the front panel and protects it from various chemical agents The entire sheet is milky white and made of silicone rubber The sheet offers protection against the following chemical agents Protects against Does not protect against Boric acid Sulfuric acid Lubricating oil Nitrogen Benzene Ammonia gas Butane Carbonic acid gas Carbonic acid Phenol Chlorinated solvents Glycerin Napthalene Ammonia water Soy bean oil Calcium chloride Toluene Developing fluid hypo Acetaldehyde Lard For information on chemical agents not listed in the table above
146. Sereen Data Diep MEMORY SWITCH gt Display the fourth memory switch screen by a a pressing the J next screen or 1 Hsec previous screen touch switch Key Press Sound ON Printer ECP Print Method Tone MEMORY SWITCH gt Press the Comm B Select touch switch 4 4 to display the communications type to be set Comm A Method Host Link set l Set The setting option changes each time Comm B Select RS 232C the touch switch is pressed Comm B Method None f serial port B is used for RS 485 communications RS 422A must be set as its communications type To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect Starting Operation Section 6 8 6 8 Starting Operation Note Switching to the RUN Mode and Starting Operation Confirming the Communications between the NT31 NT31C and the Host After completing screen data transmission and setting the communications conditions connect the NT31 NT31C t
147. Serial Communications Board or Unit For details refer to Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 69 Settings at the Host The Settings required for each Unit are described below m Connecting a C series C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H or SRM1 PLC Setup Area Settings Write the PLC Setup area data memory settings directly from a Program ming Device e g SYSMAC support software in accordance with the host model and port Connection to Writing Value C200HX HG HE Z E SRM1 DM6645 5100 Use NT link 1 N Built in RS 232C port LI highest unit number of C200HX HG HE Z E DM6555 the connected PTs 1 to 7 3 Communications Board port A CQM1H port 1 C200HX HG HE Z E DM6550 Communications Board port B 1 RS 232C port on the Communications Board 2 RS 232C port on the Serial Communications Board 3 When using a C200HE Z E the maximum PT unit number is 3 Refer to the PLC s operation manual for details on changing PLC Setup set tings Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX HG HE Z E When using a C200HX HG HE Z E the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PLC Setup area data memory effective RS 232C port communications condition setting Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PLC Setup effective OFF lt ON Connecting to CS CJ series CPU Units CS CJ series CPU Unit CS1G H CPULILI E V1 CS1G H D CPULI_IH E CJ1G M CPU
148. System Program Downloading is completed On normal completion of system program clearance the standby status for system program downloading is automatically established When the NT31 NT31C enters this status transmit the system program from the system installer at the personal computer During downloading the progress of transmission is indicated on the screen Select Run System If Abort is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading a screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed When the system program is started the NT31 NT31C starts up normally If no screen data has been registered an error message will be displayed indi cating that screen data hasn t been registered Transfer the screen data and proceed 152 Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 Reference If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a sys tem program it is not possible to use the NT31 NT31C at all After deleting the system program be sure to download a new one 6 5 3 Changing the System Settings The NT31 NT31C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the screen data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by operating errors Disabling enabling System Menu Display When System Menu display is disabled by this setting the System Menu can not be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches However if a
149. T31 NT31C PTs other than the one at the end of the cable When not using RS 422A 485 communications the terminal resistance set ting is ineffective In order to set the terminal resistance wiring work is required at the cable s connector carry out the wiring correctly by referring to APPENDIX E Making the Cable 127 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Abbreviation Pin number Connector Terminal resistor setting X Pin Nos 9ana 10 Foncion Shorted Terminal resistance is applied Short only at the NT31 NT31C connected to the end of an RS 422A 485 cable Open Terminal resistance is not applied Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31 NT31C anywhere other than at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices make sure that the power supply to all of the connected devices NT31 NT31C PLC etc is OFF Reference e The internal circuit of the NT31 NT31C is shown below 10 RDB Making a connection here inserts 16 RDA a terminator between RDB Terminal resistor 120 Q and RDA 9 TRM lt e For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host refer to setting methods for each type of the communications 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables Perform the following procedures to connect process the shield and connect to ground for communications systems using the RS
150. T31C ASCII 7 data bits 2 stop bits 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 52 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Connecting to a CPU Unit 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method page 161 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT31 NT31C in a single host link Set the CPU Bus Unit settings directly from a Programming Device e g SYS MAC support software For details on the CPU Bus Unit settings refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit Operation Manual W205 E1 L Setting the Front Switches e Unit SW3 SW4 When using communications port 2 set these switches to 0 Communications port 1 RS 232C e I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C Communications port 2 RS 232C RS 422A eCTS selection DIP SW2 and SW3 Set SW2 or SW3 to ON Set this always to 0 V To use communications port 1 set SW2 To use communications port 2 set SWS I O port selector switch a aed RS 422A e Communications condition setting DIP SW1 Set this switch to OFF Communication is executed in accordance with the CPU bus unit system settings made at the PLC The initial values for the system settings are as follows Communications
151. T31C page 182 e The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and therefore cannot be initialized 147 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Select Memory Init Quit PT Settings Memory Init Display Hisory Memory Switch Alarm History 1 0 Settings Screen Data Disp Calendar Check 1 0 Check Select Memory Table Display History Alarm History Memory Table Select Yes Initialize Memory Tables The memory tables are initialized During initialization the message Initializing is displayed If No is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the memory tables On completion of memory table initialization the message Finished is dis played and the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 148 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 6 4 6 Initializing the Memory Switches Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT31 NT31C to their sta tus on shipment Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU wit PT Settings Henory Init Display Hisory
152. T31C PT models without a V suffix NT31C and for NT31 NT31C PT models with a V1 and V2 suffix NT31 V3 System program for NT31 PT models with a V3 suffix NT31C V3 When an error occurs take remedial action by referring to the table below Ermo Probable Cause Remedial Action Mode setting error DIP switches SW1 1 to Turn the NT31 NT31C power OFF SW1 3 are all OFF or set the Memory Unit DIP switches more than one is ON correctly then turn the NT31 NT31C power back ON Protect setting error Writing to the data write Turn the NT31 NT31C power OFF automatic transmis destination has been pro set the Memory Unit DIP switches sion hibited by the setting of correctly then turn the NT31 SWe 1 or SW2 2 NT31C power back ON Protect setting error Writing to the data write Perform either of the following pro manual transmis destination has been pro cedures sion hibited by the setting of e Press the OK touch switch to SWe 1 or SWe 2 return to the Memory Unit manual transmission screen make the correct settings then try again e Turn the NT31 NT31C power OFF correct the DIP switches set tings of the Memory Unit then turn the power back ON 43 Using a Memory Unit 44 Section 3 5 Ermo Probable Cause Remedial Action Flash memory error Verify error Transmitting data error The automatic transmission only An error occurred during initialization of the NT31 NT31C or Memory
153. The following communications can be used to connect an OMRON PLC e Host link e 1 1 NT Link e 1 N NT Link standard or high speed The following communications can be used to connect another companies PLC or FA computer e Communications protocol supported by the other company s PLC e Memory link In all of these communications methods that can be used with NT31 NT31C data communications with host are by direct connection Memory link is how ever a quasi direct connection In the following the host link and NT link that carry out the direct connection will be discussed Memory links will be explained in 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links 1 4 1 Direct Connection Function With the NT31 NT31C the bits and words referring to data required for dis play and those for storing input data can be allocated to any part of the PLC memory area 16 Communications with the Host Section 1 4 Features of the Direct Connection Function 1 4 2 Host Link 1 4 3 NT Link The NT31 NT31C can directly write to and read from such allocated bits and words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen control the PT operating status and notify the host of the status This function which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits without using a PLC program is called the direct connection function The words and bits allocated for direct connection are called the allocated words and allocated bits
154. When a When a communications error occurs the error message is displayed at the Son aan Error NT31 NT31C and the buzzer sounds provided the setting made for Buzzer ccurs Sound in the System Menu is other than OFF An error message is displayed provided the setting for the Comm Auto Return memory switch is not ON note that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is ON Operation When When an error message is displayed remove the cause of the error and then Communications Errors press the OK touch switch displayed on the screen The NT31 NT31C will Occur return to the screen that was displayed before the error occurred and opera tion will restart Display of For communications errors the name of the port at which the error occurred Communications Errors the error classification Send or receive error the details of the error the probable cause and the remedy are displayed as shown below Example Parity error at serial port A Comm Port B Receive Error Parity Error occurs whi le downloading by the following case Protocol mismatch between the PT and the Host corrupted data by noise faulty connecting cable Receive Errors The following errors can occur when receiving data e Parity error e Framing error e Overrun error e FCS sum value error e Time out error e Data over flow error e PLC unit No error host link only e NAK received in the case of the host link the end code is also di
155. a Hour Min Sec 118 7 3 e Pressing Abort causes the NT31 NT31C to return to the date and time display without executing setting with the previous settings still effective 196 System Maintenance Section 6 11 6 11 3 Checking the PT Setting Status The direct connection settings of the NT31 NT31C screen data and the set tings for serial port A and serial port B can be checked Screen Configuration and There are the following three PT setting status screens Display Contents m CESES tja Te Boreen Data Type OMRON next screen com Method Bar code Reader Toite next screen Comm Method Host Link D T Control Area E1 AAMA0 E1 00004 Com Setting Data Bit Length Ibit p oom Setting Data Bit Length Toite pT Notification Area E1 0005 E1 00006 Stop Bit Length None Stop Bit Length 2bits indow Control Area E1_ 0007 E1_000015 lt j _ Parity Bit None Rreue Parity Bit Even meric Expression i l Comm Speed g6Afbps Comm Speed 192 bp xpansion I F One t previous screen Input Method Auto previous screen ompatibility NT31 631 Operation 1 next screen f previous screen Display Contents of The First Screen Screen Data Type The host type set for the screen data PT Control Area Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allo cated PT Notification Area Word at the host to which the PT status notify area
156. age by turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain period of time and then displaying character strings at random positions and in ran dom colors the colors only change for the NT31C The Screen Saver Movement setting determines whether or not these charac ter strings are displayed while the screen display is off If Display is selected the character string stored in character string memory table No 0 is displayed If Display erase is selected the character string is not displayed and the backlight is also turned off while the screen display is off The default factory setting is Display erased The screen saver can be canceled and former screen redisplayed by any of the following operations e Touching any part of the touch panel e Screen switching due to PT status control area operations e Screen switching due to bit memory table operations e Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations e Changing the backlight mode e Screen printing change from OFF to ON e Screen display change from OFF to ON Reference e The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the Screen Saver Start up Time setting For details refer to 6 9 8 Setting the Screen Saver Start up Time page 178 e Even if its operation has been set with the Screen Saver Movement set ting the screen saver function will not be executed if 000 is set for Screen Saver Start up Time e Screen saver f
157. ailable Model Cable Length Connector Specification wares am AB XWZ 5008 XW2Z 200T apin Spin XW2Z 500T When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the memory link method OMRON cable with connectors shown below are avail able Model Cable Length Connector Specification CV500 CN228 9 pin lt 25 pin XWZ 5002 Spine 8p When a connection is made at serial port B in other than the memory link method OMRON cables with connectors shown are available Model Cable Length Connector Specification XW2Z 200P 25 pin lt gt 25 pin xw2z 2008 am J pmespn XW2Z 500S The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Wiring for a Host Link Unit Applicable Units C200H LK201 EV1 25 pin Connection 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C500 LK203 3G2A6 LK201 EV 1 CV500 LK201 communications port 1 Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A XW2Z 200S 9 pin lt 25 pin 2 m XW2Z 500S 9 pin lt 25 pin 5 m Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port B XW2Z 200P 25 pin lt 25 pin 2 m XW2Z 500P 25 pin lt 25 pin 5 m CVM1 CV series Host Link Units CV500 LK201 have two types of connec tor a 25 pin connector communications port 1 and a 9 pin connector com munications port 2 When using communications port 2 refer to Wiring for Other Connections Other Than the Memory Link Method
158. aintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE_MENU Select I O Check Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Screen Data Diep Calendar Check Select Device Check Quit I F Check Device Check 211 System Maintenance Section 6 11 DEVICE CHECK MENU Select Touch Switch DEVICE Press the touch switches displayed on the screen A touch switch is normal if it is displayed in reverse video while pressed To end the check press the touch switch at the top right corner NT31 dis played in reverse video NT31C displayed in yellow The NT31 NT31C will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU Reference e The hosts is not notified of the operation of touch switches pressed during the I O check e The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right cor ner is displayed in reverse video for NT31 or displayed in yellow NT31C Start the check after the status of the touch switch at the top right corner has changed 212 System Maintenance Checking the Battery Voltage Section 6 11 Check the voltage of the NT31 NT31C s built in battery by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode TNTENANCE MODE MENUT Select I O Check Select Device Check I F Check Device Check Select Battery wit Sereen menory Screen Memory Buzzer check Touch Switch Touch Switch LED check
159. ake the DIP switch settings ON lel lel Factory settings 123 45 6 SW1 1 Not used always ON SW1 2 Setting for built in terminal resistance OFF Terminator not set ON Terminator set SW1 3 4 Selection of 2 wire type 4 wire type SW1 3 SW1 W1 4 S e 2 wire type RS 485 SW1 3 SW1 4 OFF ON 4 wire type RS 422A SW1 5 6 Selection of the RS 422A send mode SW1 5 SW1 6 ON e Continual sending SW1 5 SW1 6 OFF Complies with CS control of RS 232C ON Data sent at CS high SW1 5 SW1 6 OFF o Complies with CS control of RS 232C ON Data sent at CS low When using the host link or 1 1 NT Link set the RS 422A send mode to continual sending set both SW1 5 and 6 OFF When using the 1 N NT Link standard or high speed set the RS 422A send mode to complies with CS con trol of RS 232C i e one of SW1 5 and SW1 6 must be ON Note 1 Do not set both SW1 5 and SW1 6 ON at the same time This may damage internal circuits 2 The power supply to the device supplying 5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work 3 Before connecting the RS 232C cable and turning on the power to an RS 232C device such as a PT i e turning on the power to the Adapter check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP switch settings are correct If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault the internal circuits of the Adapter or the RS 232C device may be damaged 4 When the
160. am several times contact your OMRON service center 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program page 151 Select Download System Program and download the system program again 6 5 2 Clearing Install ing the System Program page 151 Also refer to 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission page 237 and take the corrective action described for tool transmission errors If this does not solve the problem contact your OMRON service center Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 Unable to write System Settings Hardware fault or flash memory If the same message is displayed on repeating memory for storing the system writing of system settings several times contact program has reached its life your OMRON service center If writing is normally terminated after the error message was once displayed the Memory Switch setting for system program may have been altered In such a case check and re set the set ting in the Memory Switch menu of the Mainte nance mode Unable to erase Screen Data Hardware fault or flash memory _ If the same message is displayed on repeating memory for storing the system screen data deletion several times contact your program has reached its life OMRON service center 7 2 5 Communications Errors and Their Remedies This section describes the errors relating to communications that can occur during operation and their remedies Operation
161. and set Calendar Data Backup Data Error Memory table and History data was ini tialized by backup failure It can be caused by lowered voltage of the battery With memory switch setting screen Invalid Comm Method 236 No data is registered for either the screen number set in the PT sta tus control area or the Initial Screen set with the Support Tool Or the screen number which does not exist are registered The touch panel cable film cable inside the NT31 NT31C is discon nected The memory switches have been initialized due to discovery of an error in the memory switch set tings There is an error in the date time values due for example to low battery voltage Initialization has been executed because of an error in the backup data area Protocol settings for serial port A and serial port B are mismatched Either specify a screen number for which data is registered at the PT status control area or set the screen as the Initial Screen in the System settings under PT Configuration at the Support Tool Contact your OMRON service center Set the memory switches again using the System Menu and the System settings under PT Configuration at the Support Tool SECTION 6 System Menu Opera tion If the problem recurs contact your OMRON service center Check the battery voltage by checking the color of the RUN LED and with the battery check in the System Menu if the voltage is low replace the b
162. and wiring Connector for a printer Printer on PT side side 18 36 i 20 273 Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer Appendix H 274 Appendix Relationship between System Program and Hardware Here relationship between system program and hardware is described System programs indicated below are installed for the models shown above in the default state Also system programs are supplied with the Support Tool as follows Model meoy O System program NT31 ST121LJ E i System Program version 1 L Same for pre version 1 and NT31C ST1310 supplied with the version 2 hardware but NT ZJCMX1 EV2 there are restrictions to some functions depending NT31 ST121LJ EV1 System Program version on the version of the hard NT31C ST1410 EV1 above products 2 0L or 2 1L ware that is installed December 1998 supplied with the NT ZJCMX1 EV3 NT31 ST121LJ EV2 Version upgrade of the System Program version NT31C ST141L EV2 above products 3 0L or 3 1L December 1999 supplied with the NT ZJCMX1 V4 00 NT31 ST1221_ EV2 Version upgrade of the System Program version 3 1 Only for hardware for ver NT31C ST142L Ev2 above products supplied with the sion 3 EV3 PTs Cannot be October 2004 oa as installed with pre version 1 or version 2 hardware NT31 ST123L EV3 Version upgrade of the System Program version ae NT31C ST143_ EV3 above products 4 00 September 2006 supplied with the NT ZJCMX1 V4 08
163. apter Block Diagram Appendix C A diagram showing the internal blocks of the Adapter is shown below Refer to this diagram when making cables yourself or when connecting devices with special interfaces RS 232C side D SUB 9P CASE 5 V SG RD SD RS RS 422A 485 side 264 POWER RS 4292A 485 Dr Rec 8P terminal block R H gt LED DC DC Convertor 6 Fuse l S5V Ls te A L H REG 9 IS_OV 2 SG RS 232C Photocoupler it fe 3 Dr Rec F 4 SDB ve SDA 3 T 2 wire type gt o aE at SW1 6 4 wire type ee o swi 3 J SW1 4 2 lt SW1 5 Z y A l 9 RDB Lo E LLN paar RDA 5 o ake K Terminator SW1 2 7 RS 422A Dr ein if CSB 8 CSA Appendix D Transporting and Storing the NT31 NT31C e When transporting the NT31 NT31C use the packaging intended for it e When storing the NT31 NT31C observe the following conditions Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C Storage ambient humidity 35 to 85 265 Transporting and Storing the NT31 NT31C Appendix D 266 Appendix E Making the Cable The procedure for making up the cable is described below Also refer to this procedure for making a conne
164. at the This is not an error Change the screen number from host side screen number 0 Setting the screen number to 0 turns the screen off The system startup waiting time has This is not an error The display will appear after the not elapsed yet waiting time has elapsed Cannot communicate with The Transmit mode has not been Display the System Menu and select the Transmit the Support Tool established mode 6 6 Transmitting the Screen Data Not connected to the Support Tool Check the installation of the connector cable 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool The PT model setting and direct con Using the PT Configuration settings of the Support nection setting at the Support Tool do Tool set the PT model and direct connection settings not match the NT31 NT31C that match the NT31 NT31C Cannot communicate with Memory switch settings do not match Check the communications setting in the Memory the host Switch menu of the Maintenance mode and match Cannot switch from the the communications protocol settings for the host and system initializing screen NT31 NT31C 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communi eta cations with Host by Using Memory Switches Communications error message is displayed NT31 NT31C and host are not cor Check that the type length and installation of the when communicating to rectly connected connector cable match the specifications SECTION the host 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C
165. ata 102A Image library Character string table No 13 data 102B Image library data 102B When the upper message displayed is pressed the image library data 102B set for bit memory table No 13 is displayed Recorded data Bit memory table No 24 97 12 04 11 19 20 Bit memory table No 23 97 12 04 11 25 12 Character string table No 13 Character string table No 12 You can set several words of numeric data at the PT in tabular format and write it to the host You can also read several words of numeric data from the host and display it on the PT screen System Configuration Section 1 3 1 3 System Configuration This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NT31 NT31C For details on product models refer to Appendix J Model List 1 3 1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NT31 NT31C Host Controls the NT31 NT31C as required while controlling machines and monitoring the production line Host Link CS CJ series C series and CVM1 CV series PLCs SRM1 Can be connected to CPU Units Host Link Units and SRM1 However connection is not possible to some models of CPU Unit and SRM1 Bar code reader Bar codes can be read as character strings NT Link CS CUJ series C series and CVM1 CV series PLCs SRM1 Can be connected to CPU Units and SRM1 However conne
166. ata contents When system Maintenance Mode settings and screen data registration have been completed 7 In this mode NT31 NT31C maintenance operations such as initialization of the memory checking settings and the I O To change system f ge sy check are executed settings or screen data contents SYSTEM MENU Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Power ON If there is no system program or if the settings for data i control are changed In this mode the Programming Console function is used or check the version of system program System Installer Mode In this mode the system program of the NT31 NT31C is installed display of the System Menu is enabled or disabled and screen data changes are enabled and disabled among other operations Items in the System Menu The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode screen Transmit Mode Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for screen data between the Support Tool and the NT31 NT31C For details on transmission of screen data refer to 6 6 Transmit ting the Screen Data 135 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system mainte nance of the NT31 NT31C and various NT31 NT31C settings Expansion Mode Display the
167. ata from PT uploading 250 Specifications Appendix A Communications Specifications For a Host Link RS 232C Type po y ote Specification OOO O Communications settings Start stop synchronization Communications speed 9600 19200 bps Data length 7 bits Stop bit 2 bits Parity Even Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 Communications protocol C series SYSMAC WAY 1 N When using an NT AL001 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable 2 m max e RS 422A cable Total length 500 m max For a Host Link RS 422A Type nmn Specification Communications standard EIA RS 422A Communications settings Start stop synchronization Communications speed 9600 19200 bps Data length 7 bits Stop bit 2 bits Parity Even Connector 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 500 m G series SYSWAY T N For an NT Link 1 1 RS 232C Type tem Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Serial port A 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 15m When using an NT ALO01 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable 2 m max e RS 422A cable Total length 500 m max 251 Specifications Appendix A For an NT Link 1 1
168. atically change the NT31 NT31C screen display This function can reduce the load on the PLC so that its program development efficiency is improved The host is connected to a PT in a 1 1 connection and the words and bits of the host are read and displayed by host link communications This method can be used for connection to the majority of PLC types NT link is a method for high speed communications with a PLC using the direct connection function The PLCs that can be connected with the NT link are as follows e When using the built in host link function of a CPU Unit or SRM 1 CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CS1G CS1H E V1 CS1D CJ1G CJ1H CJ1M CVM1 CV series PLC EV1 or later version SRM1 17 Communications with the Host Section 1 4 Features of the NT Link 18 Besides the 1 1 NT Link method in which one PLC is connected to one PT the NT31 NT31C can also use the 1 N connection NT Link method which allows a maximum of eight PTs to be connected to one PLC port PLCs that can be connected with the 1 N connection NT Link method are as follows CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E CS1G CS1H E V1 CS1G CS1H H CS1D CJ1G CJ1H CJ1M PLCs The NT31 NT31C also supports OMRON s high speed 1 N NT Link that pro vides faster 1 N communications The only PLCs that support the high speed 1 N NT Link are the EV1 and higher versions or the high speed versions of the CS1G CS1H PLCs and the CS1D and CJ1G CJ1H CJ1M PLCs
169. ations speed CTS 3 DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 External OE Set these switches to 0010 to select 19 200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled e CTS selection selector switch Set this always to 0 V ON e Terminator setting selector switch Set this switch to ON C200H C1000H C2000H CPU mounting Unit 3G2A6 LK202 EV1 Setting the Rear Switches e Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 5 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Parity is fixed at Even Parity Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits e Communications speed DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 0010 to select 19 200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON m e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 EERE Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled e Terminator setting DIP SW3 1 to SW3 6 Set SW3 1 SW3 3 and SW3 5 to ON 1 Set SW3 2 SW3 4 and SW3 6 to OFF 0 Set terminator ON 100 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting to a CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit CVM1 CV series Rack mounting Unit CV500 LK201 A
170. attery with a new one Checking the Battery Voltage page 213 and 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery page 243 If the battery voltage is confirmed to be normal set the calendar clock correctly from the System Menu 6 7 1 2 Display ing Setting the Calendar and Clock page 195 Check the battery voltage by checking the color of the RUN LED and with the battery check in the System Menu if the voltage is low replace the battery with a new one Checking the Battery Voltage page 213 and 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery page 243 The re transmit the memory table data from the Support Tool If the voltage is normal and the problem recurs contact your OMRON service cen ter Refer to Possible Combinations of Com munications Method Settings on page 160 and set the protocol of serial port A and serial port B so that their settings are matched Set serial port A to None when con necting the Support Tool and the host at the same time Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 7 2 2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the NT31 NT31C and their remedies The host side allocated words and Set correct words and bits after checking the area used at the host side by referring to PLC Memory Map in Appendix D of the Reference Manual or the operation manual for the PLC being used Address Setting Error Addressing Error exists
171. ax total length 500 m Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host PLC and there must be no branching Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays and communications failures PLC At termination PLC PLC Relay terminal block Relay terminal block Max 2 NT31C NT31 NT31 i NT31 NT31 NT31C NT31 NT31 NT31C NT31 Not at tat 3 At termination termination Not at _ termination termination Example of Good Connection Examples of Bad Connections Reference CS CJ series CPU Units cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT link method Use the 1 N connection NT link method standard or high speed in stead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT link 1 N Method page 109 or Using the High speed NT link 1 N Method page 113 5 2 1 Host Types and Settings The types of host that have an RS 422A port and can be connected to the RS 422A 485 port of the NT31 NT31C and the settings to be made at the host are described here 95 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 When Using the Host Link Method Compatible Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the RS 422A 485 type host link function built in With the CS CJ series and CQM1H the host link method can be used by installing a Serial Communications Board Unit
172. aximum of three windows can be displayed simultaneously Since the window need only be opened when input is required the screen can be used efficiently Numeral character string setting function Numeric keys and character keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numeric values and character strings can be input at the operation site The input data is written to numeral character string memory tables and also sent to the host It is also possible to disable input by control from the host Recipe function Several words of numeric data can be edited at the PT Unit and written to or read from the host in one operation Input from a bar code reader Data read with a bar code reader can be input to a character string input field Functions relating to communications Communications with the host The NT31 NT31C can communicate with the host by four methods host link 1 1 NT Link 1 N NT link standard or high speed and Memory link Data can be read from the host and data input by means of touch switches and numeral character string settings can be sent to the host It is also possible to connect with other model PLCs Functions relating to the system System menu System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen Creation of screen data Screen data created using the Support Tool at a personal computer can be transferred and stored in the built in screen data memory Resume fu
173. ble below and respond by following the Rem edy indicated in the table For details of the error messages displayed when using Memory Unit and cor rective action to take for them refer to 3 5 Using a Memory Unit 7 2 1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the NT31 NT31C is turned ON and when operation starts and their remedies No Comm Protocol Set the comm Protocol by MAINTE NANCE MODE Screen Data Error Screen Data corrupted Initialize Screen Memory and download Screen Data again No Screen Data No Screen Data is saved in Screen Mem ory Download Screen Data using by the Sup port Tool Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT MODE and download Screen Data again No Direct Connection Info No Direct Connection Information is set in Screen Data Set Direct Connecting Information in Screen Data using by the Support Tool Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT MODE and download Screen Data again Incorrect Screen Data Screen Data in Screen Memory do not match with the System Program Initialize Screen Memory and download Screen Data again No communications protocol has Using the memory switches set the com been set munications method to be used for com Communications protocol and munications with the host 6 7 Setting screen data type are mismatched Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memor
174. bles Numeric values can be input at the PT by using touch switches The input numeric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notification sent to the host Numeral inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit has been allocated 12345678 4 5 6 Input rol Window Character strings can be input at the PT by using touch switches bar code readers etc The input character strings can also be stored in a character string memory table and notification sent to the host String inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit has been allocated Character string setting input field Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 Thumbwheel Switches Graphs Numeric values can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with the corresponding touch switch The input numeric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notification sent to the host Thumbwheel switch inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit has been allocated These are graphics whose display changes in accordance with the numeric values stored in numeral memory tables There are the following four types Bar Graphs Bar graphs display the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range 100 to 100 of a preset value 60 a Analog Meters Analogue meters display using a quarter half
175. c fields e Nearby power cables e Potential exposure to radioactivity 3 1 2 Installation in the Operation Panel The NT31 NT31C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the panel Use the panel fittings and tool Phillips screwdriver included in the product package and follow the procedure below 1 2 3 1 Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the NT31 NT31C from the front side of the panel A ot gt y 0 5 mm lt 184 0 mm R 2 Attach the panel fittings at the four positions at top and bottom and two po sitions at right and left shown below from the rear of the NT31 NT31C Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw with the Phillips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting 30 Installation Section 3 1 e Quan t j I Emi L EE OES d UE D Eo ner a joa k S Dim Le 0 LO Note 1 During work at the panel take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the PT 2 The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1 6 mm to 4 8 mm All fit tings must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m in order to ensure water and dust resistance Front sheet of NT31 NT31C may be warped if the tightening is too strong or not uni
176. cated below NT31 NT31C Host RS 485 1 14 NT31 NT31C side NT31 NT31C side 1 14 Abbreviation Pin number Pre eee Sg 3 os O 6 a om O 6 oms O 5 O 6 oras 4 O 6 Oo 6 sanasa OS 5 RS 2320 O0 6 O connector 6 Sear O O conne O O o Cser E O 6 EE 5 O 2 oO ww fe oO O o roa 0 o 2 l Pros 5 O Q Q e Car SDA 13 23 me 23 _ wae 90 RSB AINE RSA 25 pin as 25 pin type 2 Make the connection pin numbers 9 and 10 at the terminal NT31 NT31C marked x in the figure above For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connecting an NT AL001 and Host NT31 NT31C NT ALOO1 Host RS 232C Wiring when connecting a CS series Serial Communications Board CS CS series Serial Communications Unit CQM1H Serial Communications Board or C series C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board Applicable PLCs CS1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CU1W SCU41 V1 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU1 1 12 13 21 22 23 CQM1H CPU51 61 C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE 85 ZE Note A Serial Communications Board cannot be used Usable Cables with Attached Connect
177. ce the battery by following the procedure given below To protect the contents of the memory the battery must be replaced within 5 minutes Procedure 1 Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes the memory contents can not be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery 2 Inserta flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the left of the rear face of the NT31 NT31C and pull it toward you 3 Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover grip the cable and pull the connector straight out Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 4 Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the NT31 NT31C and fit the battery under the battery cover When inserting the battery connector make sure that the projection on it faces to the left and press it fully home while keeping it straight The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after disconnecting the old battery s connector However the battery can be re placed while the NT31 NT31C power is on and in this case there is no time restriction 5 Close the battery cover making sure that the cable is not trapped 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning Cleaning Method Inspection Method Note Clean and inspect the NT31 NT31C regularly to ensure that it is always used in its optimum condition If t
178. ch switch PT Control Area E1_AAMAA E1 AAAA PT Notification Area E1 AAAAS E1 AAAAG indow Control Area E1 AAAAT E1 AAAA1S umeric Expression Binary xpansion I F None ompatibility NT31 631 Operation Press Quit Screen Data Type OMRON The NT31 NT31C returns to the PT Control Area E1 O0A0 100004 MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen PT Notification AreaE1_AAAA5 E 1_ARAAG indow Control Area E1_AAAAT E1_ARAAI5 umeric Expression Binary xpansion I F None ompatibility NT31 631 Operation 6 11 4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record 198 The display history record function is a function that records the order of dis play of each screen during operation and the number of times each screen is displayed Only the screens for which the display history screen attribute has been set in advance are processed by this function The record data can be displayed and printed out at a printer connected to the NT31 NT31C by operation from the System Menu This section explains how to display and print out the display history record data recorded in the NT31 NT31C Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence display time order and sort by frequency order of number of times displayed System Maintenance Reference Section 6 11 e With the NT31 NT31C the record data can also be displayed by calling screen No 9001 sort by occurrence or screen No 9002 sort by fre quency during the RUN mode e Fo
179. ck function None Operations can be disabled from the PLC by allocating interlock bits to the corresponding touch switch numeral input or character string input Accessible CS CJ series PLC The data areas listed below can be accessed in addition to the data data areas areas accessible with the NT30 NT30C e EM banks EM_0 to EM_C e Timer completion flags TU e Counter completion flags CU e Work areas WR e Task flags TK e HR area 1 This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data 2 The values are the same as the NT30 NT30C when the PT is in NT30 620 compatible mode For differences in programming refer to Appendix B in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Termi nal Reference Manual Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 1 2 4 Principal Functions of NT31 NT31C The following are the principal functions of the NT31 NT31C Functions relating to data display Character display Characters of various sizes can be displayed Characters can be flashed and displayed in reverse video High grade fonts are available for the characters with their size enlarged Graphic display Polylines rectangles polygons circles circular arcs and sector shapes can be displayed They can also be tiled with various patterns flashed or displayed in reverse video Memory data display The contents of character string memory tables and numeral memory tables can be displayed The c
180. cklight for the NT31 ST122L EV2 NT31 ST123L EV3 NT31C ST142L EV2 and NT31C ST143LI EV3 cannot be replaced by the user Contact your OMRON service center when the backlight needs to be replaced Replaceable Backlight Model NT31C CFLO1 for both NT31 ST121L EV2 NT31C ST141L EV2 Guide to Backlight Replacement Under normal conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need to be replaced after about 25 000 hours when used at medium brightness the fig ure is about 10 000 hours when used at the high brightness setting However the life of the backlight does vary particularly in accordance with the tempera ture in the environment in which it is used and it should be replaced when it is getting dim and the screen is getting hard to read The life expectancy of the backlight for the NT31 ST122 EV2 NT31 ST1221 EV3 NT31C ST142 EV2 and NT31C ST142 EV3 at high brightness is 50 000 hours The back light cannot be replaced by the user however Contact your OMRON service center when the backlight needs to be replaced Notes on Replacing the Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight Backion e Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger that dust or foreign bodies will enter the PT and where no water will drip onto it Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the NT31 S1T121L EV2 NT31C ST141L EV2 with your bare hands 241 Maintenance of the NT31 NT31C Section
181. con nections according to the kind of cable and port on the cable used as shown in the following table Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details Peripheral port CPM2C CN11 1CPM2C CS1W CN114 CPM2C ee Peripheral port RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin female Setting Switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board Set the switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board as fol lows Switch 1 4 wire RS 422A Switch 2 ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Serial Communications Board Inner Board slot 1 Terminator Switch TERM Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE Set to 4 right side Setting the Switches on an RS 422A Adapter CPM1 CIF 11 CPM1 2 060000000000 Set the terminator selector switch to ON upper position cooeg Connecting to a CS series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board with RS 422A 485 port equipped for CS series CPU Unit CS1W SCB41 V1 Port 2 is an RS 422A 485 port 105 106 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Serial Communications Board Switch Settings Set the switches on the Serial Com
182. ct to the PLC through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter NT31 NT31C side Abbreviation Pin number G 1 14 a 5 4 g n o z o 2 O ox RS 232C 422A 485 connector wn PLC side wn wD RDB SDB ooooo0oo0o000000 OOOO0Oo0o0o0o0o0o00Q y 25 pin type For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 117 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Wiring When Connecting a CS series Serial Communications Board CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit C series C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board CQM1H Serial Communications Board or CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit Applicable Units CS1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V 1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H See note C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE 85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 61 CV500 LK201 communications port 2 Note A Serial Communications Board cannot be used NT31 NT31C side gt amp oT lt w I Cc 3 gt D S 97 ai Jaa haa ere _ fas BR Jo olalar lojn N ajA j N D Q ie 7 0 connector PLC side O po 10 11 RDB lt connector SDB SOOVQVOCOOOOUCG O O O O O O O O O
183. cting cable for use with RS 422A 485 type connections Cable Preparation The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG 1 2 3 1 2 oo oe Cut the cable to the required length Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath Cut back the shielding wire with scissors Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire Fold back the shielding wire Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded back shielding wire Units mm inch Aluminum foil tape Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG ae iP 2 Cut the cable to the required length Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath Cut back the shielding wire with scissors Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire 267 Making the Cable Appendix E Units mm inch Vinyl tape Soldering 1 2 3 1 Slide heat shrink tube over each wire 2 Pre solder each wire and connector terminal 3 Solder each wire to each connector terminal Soldering iron Heat shrink tube F 1 5 mm dia 10 mm 4 Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the t
184. ction is not possible to some models RS 232C cable 1 Mj Sm Memory Link Can be connected to a personal computer FA computer etc RS 422A 485 cable Other companies PLCs can also be connected max 500 m Printer For printing out the currently displayed NT31 NT31C screen Personal computer Running Windows 95 98 NT Support Tool Used to create screens for the NT31 NT31C at the personal a computer and transmit them to the NT31 NT31C and to make NT31 NT31C settings _ _ _ System installer Used to change the system ame oa program of the NT31 NT31C Displays production line monitoring and instructions to the operation site and notifies the host of the switch ON OFF status and numeric value inputs When a 1 N NT Link is being used up to 8 PTs can be connected to a single PLC Can store screen data and system program to be read out automatically at startup e Bar code reader page 34 e Recommended printers page 34 It is also possible to use printers that can emulate an NEC PC PR201H using the NEC PC PR201PL control protocol and printers that comply with one of the following EPSON control standards ESC P 24 J83C col or or ESC P 24 J82 monochrome e Memory Unit page 36 NT MF261 made by OMRON e Support Tool page 33 NT series Support Tool Version 4 L for Windows Made by OMRON e NTI ZJCAT1 EV4 CD ROM version
185. ctors found on CS CJ series PLCs The CPM2C s communications port handles both RS 232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally Therefore when using the CPM2C it is necessary to select RS 232C or peripheral port con nections according to the kind of cable and port on the cable used as shown in the following table Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details Port connecting to PT PLC Setup RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CPM2C CN111_ Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CPM2C CN11 1 Peripheral port settings RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CS1W CN118 Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CS1W CN114 Peripheral port settings Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Peripheral port CPM2C CN111 CPM2C csiw CN118 CPM2C csiw CN114 CPM2C ii ee i i i SS RS 232C port Peripheral port RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin female D Sub 9 pin female Setting the DIP Switches on the Front of a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 CQM1H When using a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 or CQM1H the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PLC Setup area data memory effective C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 CQM1H bh i ta D wi D J a RS 232C port communications condition setting Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PLC Setup effective Setting the Switches of a CPM2A When using a CPM2A the switches on the
186. cur in the PT and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors 72 Troubleshoot versses 2525 3 oe peor kad deen dete asin woes 232 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 0 0000 ce eee aes 235 7 2 1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies 235 7 2 2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies 23 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission 237 7 2 4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies 238 7 2 5 Communications Errors and Their Remedies 239 T UMaintenance ofthe NTON TSC oso pace go aang See a dco a Ba 241 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery 2 0 cee nee 243 7 4 ANSpeciomand Cleanine lt 2 rrey naaa E EEN E eee lewone 245 231 Troubleshooting Section 7 1 7 1 Troubleshooting When a fault relating to the operation of the NT31 NT31C occurs find the symptoms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Remedy indicated in the table Note 1 Confirm system safety before turning the power ON OFF or resetting 2 Donot disassemble the PT for repair or modification nee Power LED fails to come Power is not being supplied Check the connections and make sure that power is ON supplied correctly 3 1 3 Power Supply Connection page 31 Power supply fuse has blown Contact your OMRON service center Nothing is displayed on the Screen No 0 has been read
187. d from the System Menu 277 Relationship between System Program and Hardware Appendix 278 Appendix J Model List PTs Moder Specification NT31 ST123 EV3 STN monochrome display beige NT31 ST123B EV3 STN monochrome display black NT31C ST143 EV3 STN color display beige NT31C ST143B EV3 STN color display black Host Link Units Model Specification Applicable PLC 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 CPU mounting Unit with RS 232C connector C series 3G2A6 LK202 EV1 CPU mounting Unit with RS 422A connector C1000H C2000H C200H LK201 V1 Rack mounting Unit with RS 232C connector for C200H C series C200H LK202 V1 Rack mounting Unit with RS 422A connector for C200H C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 LK201 EV1 Features a selectable RS 232C RS 422A connector C series ee LK203 Rack mounting Unit for C500 C1000H C2000H CV500 LK201 Features an RS 232C connector and a selectable RS 232C CVM1 CV series RS 422A connector CV500 Rack mounting Unit for CVM1 CV CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CompoBus S Master Control Unit Model Specification Model Name SRM1 C02 V2 Features an RS 232C port SRM1 Communications Unit Model f Specification pplicable PLC CS1iW SCU21 V1 RS 232C 2 ports CS series Rack mounting Unit CS1G H D CS1W SCU31 V1 RA 422A 485 2 ports Rack mounting Unit CJ1iW SCU21 V1 RS 232C 2 ports CJ series CJ1W SCU31 V1 RA 422A 485 2 ports CJ1G H M CJ1W SCU41 V1 RS 232C 1 port RA 422A 485
188. dded to the table Page 269 Indications inside connector graphics corrected and a note about the use of shielding wire added to each graphic 03 June 2004 CS1 was changed to CS and the abbreviation for Programmable Controllers was unified to PLC The following changes were also made Page 5 Added new models to table Page 7 Added information on backlight color Also added details on battery replace ment for new models Page 17 Added information on backlight replacement for new models Page 23 Corrected and added information on reference manuals to table Page 29 Added new models to table Page 33 Changed information in table on power supply specifications Page 39 Added new models to introduction Page 59 Corrected DIP switch setting for SW3 6 from ON to OFF in graphic Page 79 Added CS series PLC to graphic Page 82 Added information on cables for CS series CPU Units Page 90 Removed information on cables with connectors Page 91 Added information on cables for CS series CPU Units Page 150 Added information on System Installer mode versions Page 193 Added information on backlight brightness Page 223 Added and corrected information on CS1G CS1H PLCs Page 224 Corrected can to cannot in note Page 241 Added information on backlight replacement for new models Page 242 Added information on backlight replacement for new models and changed model numbers Page 243 Changed NT31 NT31C to
189. displayed around the dis ON OFF Line Frame play elements for showing the positions registered Default factory setting 202 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Reference Each setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu Exiting from this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default all the set tings are set to OFF Operations On The SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen The function shown below can be set on the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which mul tiple display elements have been registered overlapping each other a Equivalent to 2 touch switches 14 4 mm c b Equivalent to 2 touch switches 14 4 mm a Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the screen in the order in which the display elements were registered ex cluding fixed display elements b Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the screen in the order in which the display elements were registered ex cluding fixed display elements c Return to the screen on which screens are specified 203 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen 204 Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below SYSTEM MENU JI Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MA
190. ds for the C200HX HG HE Z E in which port B is the RS 422A 485 port Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 e There are no Serial Communications Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is the RS 422A 485 port Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board Set the switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board as fol lows Switch 1 4 wire RS 422A or 2 wire RS 485 Switch 2 ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A or 2 wire RS 485 Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Serial Communications Board Inner Board slot 1 Terminator Switch TERM Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE When using RS 422A Set to 4 right side for 4 wire type When using RS 485 Set to 2 left side for 2 wire type Connecting to CS series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board with RS 422A 485 port equipped for CS series CPU Unit CS1W SCB41 V1 The port 2 is an RS 422A 485 port Setting the Front Switches Set the switches on the Serial Communications Board as shown below 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A or 2 wire RS 485 Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON termina
191. e combinations of communications methods and PLCs that can support the PT s Device Monitor function Communications PLC model method 1 1 NT Link C200HS CPU21 23 31 33 E C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CPM1 10CDR L CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 10CD CPM1A 20CD CPM1A 30CD CPM1A 40CD CPM2A 30CD CPM2A 40CD CPM2A 60CD CPM2C 10 CPM2C 20 CQM1 CPU4_1 EV1 CQM1H CPU21 51 61 SRM1 C02 V2 1 N NT Link C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CQM1H CPU21 51 61 SRM1 C02 V2 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 T A CPM1 CIF0O1 RS 232C Adapter is required 2 Use a Conversion Cable CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect to the PLC 6 13 2 Connection Method CQM1H or C200HX HG The 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link can be used The connection method is HE ZE exactly the same as for the 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC CQM1 or C200HS T
192. e message Erasing is displayed Yes e If Return to Menu is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without clearing the screen data e If screen data clearance fails a screen asking if you wish to try again is displayed On completion of screen data clearance the NT31 NT31C returns to the Sys tem Installer mode menu screen After the screen data has been cleared if an attempt is made to set the NT31 NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from the Support Tool or Memory Unit an error message will be displayed and the RUN mode will not be established 6 6 Transmitting the Screen Data The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the NT31 NT31C This section explains how to transmit the screen data For details on how to create the screen data and the operation of the Support Tool refer to the Reference Manual and the N T series Support Tool Ver 4 1 for Windows Operation Manual V061 E1 L Reference e The screen data can be transmitted also from the Memory Unit installed in the NT31 NT31C For details on this method refer to 3 5 Using a Mem ory Unit e The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting High for Baud Rate on the Comms Setting window of the Support Tool 155 Screen Data Composition and Transmission Units Transmitting Screen Data from the Support Tool 156 1 2 3 Transmitting the Screen Data S
193. e touch panel The menu tree starting from the System Menu is shown below For details on System Menu operations refer to 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu page 138 The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the NT31 NT31C The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the NT31 NT31C on shipment is shown below SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE Exit System Installer Download System Program page 152 Change System Settings page 153 Erase Screen Data page 154 SYSTEM MENU Quit MEMORY INIT MENU SWITCH MENU Transmit Mode page 155 Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MEMORY Start up Wait Time page 171 Key Press Sound page 171 Buzzer Sound page 172 Printer Controller page 173 Print Method page 175 Screen Saver Movement page 176 Screen Saver Start up Time page 178 Quit Screen Data page 140 Display History page 142 Alarm History page 144 Recipe Table page 146 Memory Table page 147 Memory Switch page 149 MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Quit Hist Disp Method page 180 Memory Init Resume Function page 182 Memory Switch Comm Auto return page 184 I O Settings Time out Interval page 186 Calendar Check page 195 PT Settings page 197 Display History Alarm History Screen Data Disp page 202 1 O Check Retry Counts page 187 Comm A Method page 159 Comm B Select page 168 Comm B Method page 159 O SETTING
194. ection 6 6 e If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for System Setting in the System Installer mode screen data transmission is not possible The screen data comprises the following types of data e User screen data screen units e System memory memory switch settings e Direct connection information e Numeral memory table data e Character string memory table data e Bit memory table data e Mathematical table data e Mark information e Image library data e Recipe table data It is possible to transmit the screen data data for all the screens in file units or to transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in data units It is not possible to transmit mathematical table data in data units When data is transmitted in file units all of the screen data in the NT31 NT31C is cleared and then the new data is transmitted When data is transmitted in data units first the previous data is invalidated then the new data is registered as valid data Since the previous data is not cleared free memory area in the NT31 NT31C will be insufficient when trans missions in data units are repeated If this happens write the screen data again by data transmission in file units To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT31 NT31C follow the procedure below Operation 1 Connect the NT31 NT31C to a personal computer in which the Support Tool has been installed and turn the power to the NT
195. ed In this example serial port A is used I gt ctr a 5 Comm B Method None KMEMORY SWITCH gt 4 Press the Set touch switch to the right of the Quit 474 t port at which the setting has been made Comm A Method Memory Link Iset IN this example serial port A is used Comm B Select R 232C Comm B Method None Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 uiti Display the data bits to be set 7 bits or 8 bits by pressing the Data Bit Length touch switch Memory Link Display the stop bits to be set 1 bit or 2 bits ataih 7 bite bps by pressing the Stop Bit Length touch switch Stop Bit i bit Otro None Display the parity to be set None even odd None Vee by pressing the Parity Bit touch switch Display the communications speed to be set 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps by pressing the Comm Speed touch switch Display the condition of the flow control to be set None RS CS XON XOFF by pressing Flow Control touch switch If the RS 422A is selected for serial port B setting RS CS is not displayed Display presence or absence of the response by pressing the Response touch switch The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed In this example serial port A is used duit Press the Quit touch switch Memory Link Data Bit 7 bite 96bes Stop Bit Flow Length 1 bit Control
196. ed in words at the host directly to the NT31 NT31C This makes data conversion by a program at the host unneces sary reducing the load on the host Any quadrupled characters are displayed with a 32 dot high definition font By using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool Type NT ZJCAT1 EV4 the system program at the NT31 NT31C can be changed eas ily from a personal computer The NT31 NT31C meets UL CSA standards and EC directives Compatible with Sequencers in the following series Mitsubishi A series Cal culator Link and FX series Programming Console Allen Bradley SLC 500 Series GE Fanuc 90 20 and 90 30 Series and Siemens S7 300 and S7 400 Series Specialized system programs can be installed that allow the NT31 NT31C to be controlled from other companies Sequencers Up to 3 windows can be displayed simultaneously in the normal screen A 9 word window control area has been allocated to the host the contents of these 9 words can be changed from the Host to open close and move win dows The V2 versions are compatible with the high speed 1 N NT Link as well as the earlier standard 1 N NT Link Operands values referenced by formula can be registered to allow the PT to perform calculations automatically and write the results of those calculations to numeral memory tables or words in the host The new device monitor function can be used to change the PLC s operating mode or display change values in the P
197. ed to a PLC port must use either the standard or high speed 1 N NT Link the two communications systems cannot share a single port When using a C200HX HG HE Z E PLC and standard 1 N NT Links up to three 1 N NT Link systems i e 24 PTs can be connected by installing a Communications Board in the option slot of the CPU Unit Only the standard 1 N NT Link can be used For details on the Communications Board refer to the SYSMAC Communications Board Operation Manual W304 E1 L When using a CQM1H PLC and standard 1 N NT Links multiple 1 N NT Link systems can be connected by installing Serial Communications Boards in the Inner Board slots For details on the Serial Communications Board refer to the CQM1H Serial Communications Board Operation Man ual W365 E1 L Communications Using Memory Links Section 1 5 e Multiple 1 N NT Link systems standard or high speed can be connected by installing a Communications Board in the Inner Board slot of the CPU Unit for a CS1G H D PLC or installing a Serial Communications Unit on the Backplane for a CS1G H D or a CJ1G M H PLC For details on the Communications Board Communications Unit refer to the CS CJ series Serial Communications Board Unit Operation Manual W336 E1 L e f the PLC used supports the Programming Console function the NT31 NT31C can be used as a Programming Console e If the PLC being used supports the Device Monitor function the NT31 NT31C can be used to change the PLC s
198. ed with an NT ALOO1 be sure to connect process the shield and connect to ground as shown in Figure b Example of Recommended Wiring Figure b CPU Rack CPU Unit or Power a RS 422A 485 FG Signal line 129 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 130 SECTION 6 System Menu Operation This section describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start the PT Functions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also explained here 6 1 System Menu Operation Flow 00 cee ee teens 133 6 2 Stanine be NISUN IC asccc eve danee de ee detee dow een aedend 133 6 271 JOperation dt Starip 65 2 asi on Gdenie I oes ets ae oes 133 6 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu 0 0 0 cece eee 135 6 3 1 Relationships among Modes 000 cee eee ees 135 0 522 ME e Eesi R acsitue nde a Meade ck beeen es 137 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu 0000055 138 6 4 Memory Inia 7ZauOn 22444 4ee 4k hehe De hate eee eee e 140 6 4 1 Clearing Screen Data oct ethane howd oto ian nonono 140 6 4 2 Initializing Display History Record Data 142 6 4 3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data 144 6 4 4 Initializing the Recipe Tables 20 0000s 146 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables 0 0000005 147 6 4 6 Initializing the Me
199. edure refer to 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode 133 Starting the NT31 NT31C Memory Unit Check and Processing Start of Communications with the Host Operation Start 134 Section 6 2 Check if a Memory Unit is installed If a Memory Unit is installed processing screen data and system program reading writing is executed in accordance with its DIP switch settings page 36 If there is an error in the screen data an error screen is displayed Pressing the OK touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immedi ately before the error occurred It is also possible to display the System Menu from the error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously If there is an error in the system program the main menu of the system installer mode is displayed If this is the case reinstall the proper system program Initialize the memory or change the settings as required Communications with the host starts in accordance with the communications method set in the system memory of the NT31 NT31C During the interval until communications are established the system initialization screen screen No 9000 is displayed For details refer to 6 8 Starting Operation If the system initialization screen remains on display the System Menu by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously and check the settings for the communications conditions for communicatio
200. eens tion of screen data for Screen Memory Protect to Enabled then repeat the screen data delete operation pages 153 and Screen data memory 154 check Displaying the initializa tion menu Displaying the calendar time setting screen Cannot input numeric val The upper lower max min limit Check the screen data s upper lower max min limit ues check for numeric value input is in check setting for numeric value input and correct it if effect necessary Refer to 2 12 Inputting Numeric Values in the Reference Manual for details Cannot input numeric val Bit 5 of the PT status control area Set bit 5 to 0 OFF Refer to 2 2 1 PT Status Control ues character strings numeral character string input is set Area Host lt gt PT in the Reference Manual for to 1 ON details The interlock function is set for the Inputs are prohibited in input fields when the corre input field and the controlling interlock sponding interlock bit is OFF Check the status of the bit is OFF corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON Window screen does not Bit 6 ofthe PT status control area PT Set bit 6 to O OFF Refer to 2 2 7 PT Status Control open window opening is set to 1 ON Area Host lt gt PT in the Reference Manual for details Cannot switch screens Bit 4 of the PT status control area PT Set bit 4 to O OFF Refer to 2 2 1 PT Status Control with touch switches screen switching is set to 1 ON Area Host lt PT
201. en Data Diep Calendar Check 4 Press J next screen or T previous ar gE screen to display the second memory Wait Time asec switch setting screen Select Memory Switch Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF er Controller ESC P Print Method Tone _ j Press Resume Function to display the 2 4 required setting Screen Saver l Display erased The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed lt MEMORY SWITCH gt 1 4 Screen Saver Start up Time fg Amin No Movemnet Hist Disp Method From New Data Resume Function OFF To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 183 System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function The NT31 NT31C has a function for ignoring communications errors and automatically returning to the RUN mode when they occur The Comm Auto return setting determines whether the automatic reset func tion is effective or not
202. eries CPU Units and any versions of the CJ series CPU Units Furthermore the high speed 1 N NT Link method can be used with earlier versions of CS series CPU Units by installing the latest version of a Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit CJ series PLCs can also be connected to a high speed 1 N NT Link through a Serial Communication Unit Be sure to check the model number of the PLC and Serial Communications Board Unit before trying to establish the high speed 1 N NT Link 69 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 70 The following table shows which CS series PLCs can be connected to an NT31 NT31C with the high speed 1 N NT Link PLC Series CPU Units with Built in CPU Units Connectable with Connect NT Link Function Communications Board or Unit able to CS series CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E v1 2 CS1G evi 2 CS1H CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 2 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 i csiD Evy 4 1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H 72 CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ series CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G cPU44 45 4 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H i 4 CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H 4 CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CJ1H CPU6SH 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 1 The high speed 1 N NT Link is not supported for a direct connection to the CPU Unit of a CS series CPU Unit without the V1 suffix 2 A CS1W SCB21 or CS1W SCB41 V1 Serial Co
203. ers used in other units Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the settings are written they become effective by turn ing the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or execution of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the set tings are shown m DM30000 100xunit CH m 10 8000 host link mode 2 stop bits even parity data length 7 bits m 1 m 11 0000 Communications speed 9600 bps 0007 Communications speed 19200 bps 0000 Transmit delay time O ms 0000 No CTS control Unit No 0 for host link 60 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 When Using the NT Link 1 1 Method Compatible Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the NT link 1 1 function built in With CQM1H PLCs a Serial Communications Board can be added to provide 1 1 NT Link communications Some C200HX HG HE Z E CPU Units can be connected by the NT link 1 1 method by installing a Communications Board Check the model and series of the PLC against the type of CPU Unit before making the connections The Units that can be connected to the NT31 NT31C by the NT link 1 1 method using the RS 232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table below CPU Units with Built
204. essed pee In this example serial port A is used Comm Port Host Link Press Quit Comm Port A Host Link The communications speed is set g600bps e To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the com munications speed press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 and the previous com munications speed remains in effect On completion of communications speed setting the NT31 NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 162 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 3 Setting the NT Link 1 1 Method Set the communications conditions for the NT link 1 1 method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintena
205. et up or operate a Programmable Terminal 1 Intended 7A Gdie nies 5s ast diate re ws ah aca ete Rig we hs A we oh Ae eee XV1 2 General Precautions 000 cece cee eee eee xvi 3 Safely PreCauulOns eeann a aa aa a aaan aS xvi XV Intended Audience 1 2 3 Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equi
206. ethod a connection can be made to any arbitrary RS 422 unit When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PLCs refer to the PLC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or Multi Vendor Connection Manual VO60 E1 L e Method in which the RS 422A ports of the NT31 NT31C and host are connected directly by an RS 422A cable page 116 When this method is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m PT Host RS 422A cable max 500 m e Method in which the RS 485 ports of the NT381 NT31C and host are con nected by an RS 485 cable page 119 When this method is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m 94 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 This connection method can be used only with the NT link 1 N meth od standard or high speed of type RS 485 PT Host RS 485 cable max 500 m e Method in which the RS 422A ports of multiple NT31 NT31Cs and the RS 422A port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection page 121 This connection method is used with the RS 422A type NT link 1 N method standard or high speed PT Host RS 422A cable LL max total length 500 m e Method in which the RS 485 ports of multiple NT31 NT31Cs and the RS 485 port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection page 124 This connection method is used with the RS 485 type NT link 1 N method standard or high speed PT Host RS 485 cable LL m
207. f Nene Par i to it None Yes e To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the com munications speed press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 and the previous com munications speed remains in effect On completion of communications speed setting the NT31 NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 167 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 6 Setting the Communications Type for Serial Port B 168 Reference Set the communications type RS 2382C or RS 422A for serial port B by fol lowing the operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU J Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MEND JI Select Memory Switch Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings
208. f the screen changes the way the display elements overlap each other in the order in which they are registered In this example the bottom portion of the touch switch which is under the lamp will be displayed over the lamp When you have finished checking the screen press the central part of the screen to return to the screen number selection screen 6 11 7 Device Check If you wish to continue by checking another screen repeat the operation starting by specifying the screen number To end the operation press Quit on the screen number selection screen The NT31 NT31C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen The NT31 NT31C provides checks on the functions of the following items e Buzzer page 206 e LED page 207 e LCD page 208 e Backlight page 209 e Screen data memory page 209 e Touch switches page 211 e Battery voltage page 213 205 System Maintenance Checking the Buzzer 206 Reference Section 6 11 Check if the buzzer sounds correctly The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the Buzzer Sound memory switch Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Expansion Mode Select I O Check TMA E 170 Settings Screen Data Diep 1 0 CHECK MENU JI I F Check Device Check MAINTENANCE MODE MENUT Init Select Device
209. ffect 6 9 3 Setting the Key Press Sound It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch switch on the NT31 NT31C screen is pressed e ON When a touch switch is pressed the key sound sounds for 0 2 sec onds e OFF The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed 171 System Settings Section 6 9 The default factory setting is ON Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU JI Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU J MAINT 170 Settings Screen Data Diep Select Memory Switch MEMORY SWITCH gt ti J Press Key Press Sound to display ON 174 tje or OFF Start up l l Wait Time asec The setting option changes each time Key Press Sound ON the touch switch is pressed Printer Print Method Tone To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings st
210. fication Communications standard EIA RS 422A 485 Connector 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 to 8 Transmission distance Max 500 m For a Memory Link RS 232C Type tem Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C Communications settings Start stop synchronization Communications speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Data length 7 8 bits Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None RS CS XON XOFF Response Presence absence Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Serial port A 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B Number of Units connected 1 1 Communications protocol Memory link When using NT AL001 specification is as follows e RS 232C Max 2m e RS 422A Max total length 500 m 253 Specifications Appendix A For a Memory Link RS 422A Type po tem Specification OOO Communications settings Start stop synchronization Communications speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Data length 7 8 bits Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None XON XOFF Response Presence absence 25 pin D SUB connector female serial port B For a Bar Code Reader O ttem Specification O S Communications settings Start stop synchronization Communications speed 4 800 9600 19200 bps Data length 7 8 bits Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control RS CS 9 pin D SUB
211. formity The panel must not be soiled or warped and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure and strong 3 1 3 Power Supply Connection Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals Note 1 Depending on how the power is switched ON OFF the entire system may stop Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON OFF Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation Do not perform a dielectric strength test If complying with EC directives low voltage directives use a power supply with reinforced insulation compliance with EC directives is planned for June 1998 D oe 2 7 24 VDC Breaker XOXOXO 24 VDC power supply Power Supply The applicable power supply specifications are as follows O nem O o Power supply 24 VDC Allowable power sup 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 10 ply voltage fluctuation range Power supply voltage 15 W or more capacity Parts Used for Connection Note For the connection to the power supply terminal block twisted wires of 2 mm or greater cross sectional area and M3 5 size crimp terminals must be used 31 Installation Note 3 1 4 Grounding 1 2 3 Note 32 Section 3 1 Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0 8 N m Fork type Round type
212. front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective ON Set the Communications switch to OFF down position OFF Setting the Switches of a CPM2C When using a CPM2C the switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective 63 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the peripheral port and RS 232C port po e Connecting PT to peripheral port EE e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A device that requires non standard communications settings is connected to the peripheral port PRO OME SW1 OFF SW2 ON Swi SWe2 e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port PRO Sem SW1 OFF SW2 OFF sw SW2 Setting the Switches on an RS 232C Adapter When using a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter set the mode switch as shown in the following diagram CPM1 CIFO1 Set the mode setting switch to NT lower position Connecting to CVM1 CV Series EVL Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows Oo00000 I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C DIP switch setting SWS ____ Set SW3 to use NT link ON right side When using the CVM1 CV series CPU Unit execution processing execut
213. h switches numeral inputs and character string inputs e Mathematical function e Device Monitor function e NT30 620 compatible mode e Expanded capabilities for label guide character displays including multiple lines of text ON OFF switching displays numeral memory table displays and character string memory table displays The following functions cannot be used e Installation of system programs using Memory Unit e High definition font display Hardware NT31 ST121_ E NT31C ST141Ll E NT31 ST121 122_ EV2 NT31C ST141 142_ EV2 The following functions cannot be used e Analogue meter e High definition font display e Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs e Memory link e Window control from the host e Multiple display of window screens e Moving a window e Additional data areas accessible in CS CJ series PLCs e The CS Cu series high speed 1 N NT Link e Interlock function that controls touch switches numeral inputs and character string inputs e Mathematical function e Device Monitor function e NT30 620 compatible mode e Expanded capabilities for label guide character displays including multiple lines of text ON OFF switching displays numeral memory table displays and character string memory table displays Installation of system programs using Memory Unit is possible All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used The system program s version can be checke
214. h setting When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller the setting is fixed as Tone e Color Color images are printed in color e Tone Color images are printed in monochrome tones The default factory setting is Tone e In addition to this setting NT31C has the Printer Controller setting page 173 e For details on the print function refer to 2 15 7 Print Function in the Ref erence Manual Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode TENANCE MODE MENU Select Memory Switch Press Print Method to display the required printing method Start up l The setting option changes each time the Key Press Sound touch switch is pressed Print Method Tone 175 System Settings Section 6 9 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement The NT31 NT31C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterim
215. h the RS 422A terminal block cover closed 30 W x 114 H x 119 5 D mm with the RS 422A terminal block cover open 4 0 16 IOUN 1 18 B 1 77 Methods for Mounting and Removal The RS 232 RS 422 Adapter NT AL001 E can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel The RS 422A terminal block of the Adapter can be easily removed Mounting to a DIN Rail Latch the top part of the rear face of the Adapter a in the figure onto the top edge of the DIN rail and push the Adapter in the direction indicated by b in the figure Now fit end plates at the right and left of the Adapter to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally 259 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter Appendix C Removal from a DIN Rail Remove the end plates at right and left of the Adapter and as shown in the figure below insert a flat blade screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the Adapter and prize it free Mounting to an Operation Panel Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm 0 08 inch and secure the Adapter with screws NIsS at V N oS 100 T Pee W 3 94 gt iel i NS sa Be a N a ik rot gt 2 M4 W 2i l 0 83 Units mm inch Note In order to ensure a secure and strong mount mount the Adapter in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm 0 08 inch 260 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter Appendix
216. has occurred e At the same as the System Menu is displayed the operation of the NT31 NT31C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF Touching The Corners of The Touch Panel When two of the four corners of the touch panel see the figure below are touched simultaneously the System Menu is displayed RUN mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Press any two of the four a gt corners at the same time Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed at corners on the screen If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first the touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed In particular when the touch switch has switch screen function as a result of screen switch over it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept press ing To successfully call the System Menu first press a corner where no touch switch is displayed and then press any other corner regardless of the pres ence of a touch switch With the NT31 NT31C the System Menu can be displayed even if the screen has touch switches registered at all four corners Pressing a Touch Switch That Displays The System Menu There is a control key that has the function of displaying the System Menu By registering the touch switch for System Menu display MENU on a screen when creating it the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing this switch If the NT31 NT31C has no system program
217. he 1 1 NT Link can be used The connection method is exactly the same as for the 1 1 NT Link Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC 226 Section 6 13 Device Monitor Function CPM1 CPM2A or SRM1 CPM2C CS CJU Series The 1 1 NT Link can be used in all CPU Units and the 1 N NT Link can also be used in V2 and higher versions of the SRM1 The connection method is exactly the same as for the 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link With a CPM1 connect the RS 232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SEC TION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on con necting to the PLC The 1 1 NT Link can be used The connection method is the same as for the NT Link 1 1 Connect to the PLC s communications connector with a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter ora CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SEC TION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on con necting to the PLC The 1 N NT Link standard or high speed can be used The connection method is exactly the same as for the 1 N NT Link Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or
218. he Refer screen are not displayed The total of the element coefficients e 7ce Manual Create the screen data again and then for the displayed screen is greater transmit all of the screen data in a batch to the NT31 than 1024 NT31C On an overlapping screen Since the data is transmitted from the Check the maximum number of elements by referring some of the set elements host in screen units the number of to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the Refer are not displayed elements on the overlapping screen ence Manual Create the screen data again and then has exceeded the maximum permis send all the screen data in a batch to the NT31 sible without being checked by the NT31C Support Tool The System Menu cannot Display System Menu under Change In the System Installer mode set Display System be called up System Settings in the System Menu to Enabled page 153 Installer mode is set to Disabled The following System Screen Memory Protect under In the System Installer mode set Screen Memory Menu operations are not Change System Setting in the Sys Protect to Enabled page 153 possible tem Installer mode is set to Disabled Establishing the Transmit Screen Memory Protect has been set Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of mode to Disabled because the PT power screen data Displaying the memory supply was turned OFF during dele In the System Installer mode first change the setting switch setting scr
219. he bar code reader must be connected to serial port A This means that it can not be connected at the same time as the Support Tool Note also that when a bar code reader is used the host must be connected at serial port B 3 4 2 Setting a Bar Code Reader After connecting a bar code reader set the communications conditions and other settings for it by selection from the system menu Settings at the NT31 At the NT31 NT31C set the communications conditions for communications NT31C with the bar code reader by using the memory switches selecting from the options indicated in the table below For more detailed information on the actual system menu operations refer to 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Wem Possible Settings Default Setting __ Settings at the Bar Code Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader Make sure Reader that the communications speed parity stop bit and data bit settings match the communications settings made at the NT31 NT31C For details on the set ting method refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used Possible Settings Communications speed 4800 9600 19200 bps EVEN ODD NONE Stop bits 1 or 2 bits Data bits 7 or 8 bits Postamble RS CS control Available 35 Using a Memory Unit 3 4 3 Data Format Section 3 5 OOOO o nem o Possible Settings Communications protocol No protocol mode Transmission of number of bar code label digit
220. he display is dirty the screen is difficult to see Clean the screen from time to time as follows e In daily cleaning wipe the display with a soft dry cloth If the soiling is par ticularly heavy attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the front sheet of the PT In this case wipe with a damp cloth e If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth wet the cloth with diluted neutral detergent 2 wring it out well and wipe the display with it e If rubber or vinyl products tape etc are left stuck to the display for long periods they will cause staining If such items are stuck to the display remove them during cleaning Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners or chemical dusters In normal environments inspect the NT31 NT31C at intervals of between 6 months and a year In environments that are extremely hot and humid or very dusty environments shorten the inspection interval Items Required for The Inspection Prepare the following items before starting the inspection e Screwdrivers Phillips flat head e Tester or digital voltmeter e Industrial alcohol e 100 cotton cloth e Hygrometer required in some cases e Thermometer required in some cases e Synchroscope required in some cases e Pen writing oscilloscope required in some cases 245 Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 Points Inspected Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence f
221. he memory link are as follows e In the memory link method the communications with the host should be carried out by using commands Compared to the ordinal direct connec tion which can be used requiring almost no programs the memory link method requires a program that is necessary for interchange of com mands This however gives advantages to the memory link method by using a large variety of functions available in the direct connections from major models such as a personal computer and a FA computer equipped with RS 232C RS 422A communications means allowing the PT to be suited for larger usage Actual PLCs have many kinds of areas where as PT memory is a single area with only one kind When creating screen data by using the memory link methods it is always necessary to allocate display parts in the PT memory For communications between the host and the PT by the memory link method and for handling screen display elements refer to the N731 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual 1 5 3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function 20 When memory link communications are being used the NT31 NT31C can be switched to Transmit mode from the host even if the NT31 NT31C is operating and screen data can be written The NT31 NT31C can be returned to RUN mode after the screen data is written Before Operating Section 1 6 The memory link online transfer function can be used to replace screen data at a fixed time each
222. he settings in the PLC Setup area data memory effective C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H gBgNOEOL ON OFF RS 232C port communications condition setting Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PLC Setup effective When using the CQM1H s built in peripheral port turn ON SW7 Setting the Switches of a CPM2A When using a CPM2A the switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective ON Set the Communications switch to OFF down position OFF 57 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 58 Setting the Switches of a CPM2C When using a CPM2C the switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the peripheral port and RS 232C port po e Connecting PT to peripheral port son Len e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A device that requires non standard communications settings is connected to the peripheral port PRO SMeenm SW1 OFF a SW2 ON Swi SW2 e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port PRO Imeem S W1 OFF SW2 OFF sw SW2 Setting the Switches on an RS 232C Adapter When using a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter set the mode switch as shown in the following diagram CPM1 CIFO1 CPM1 290000000000
223. heral port through a Connecting Cable CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN118 or CS1W CN114 The CPM2C CN111 splits the Unit s Communications Port into a RS 232C port and a peripheral port A CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter is also required to connect to this periph eral port PLC Setup Area Settings When connecting to a C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 or CQM1H or SRM1 set the following communications con ditions for the PLC Setup area tem Setting at Host Host link mode Ce 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method page 161 Set the PLC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device e g the CX Programmer support software For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area refer to the manual for the PLC which is used The PLC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the Unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below CPM2A CPM2C CQM1H or SRM1 Peripheral port connection Word Wrtngvae sems DM6650 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communications conditions set by the contents of DM DM6651 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps DM6653 0000 Unit 00 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM2A CP
224. hod for confirming the input data Reference e For details on bar code reader types and connection methods refer to 3 4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader in this manual and for details on how to use a bar code reader refer to 3 7 Inout of Numeric Values and Character Strings in the Reference Manual e The bar code reader is connected to serial port A This means that serial port B must be used for communications with the host Communications Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers Settingltem Funcion SetngOptions Page Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader 4800 9600 or 19200 speed bps Input method Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a charac Manual Auto 189 ter string input field Manual The data is confirmed with a touch switch The data can be corrected and character strings can be added Auto The data is automatically confirmed when it is input Default factory setting Setting the Communications Conditions and Setting Method Set the bar code reader communications conditions and method of confirma tion at input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU J Transmit Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU JI Select Memory Switch 189 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Section 6 10 190 lt MEMORY_ SWITCH Press J next screen or T previous Start up screen to display the fourth memory Wa
225. hod is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m PT RS 232C RS 422A Host convertor unit RS 422A cable RS 232C max 500 m cable max 2 m e Method in which the RS 485 port of the NT31 NT31C and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 1 connection via an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter page 82 When this method is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m This connection method can be used only with the NT link 1 N method of type RS 485 PT RS 232C RS 422A Host convertor unit RS 485 cable RS 232C max 500 m cable max 2 m e Method in which the RS 422A ports of multiple NT31 NT31Cs and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection via an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter page 86 This connection method is used with the RS 422A type NT link 1 N method PT RS 232C RS422A Host convertor unit RS 422A cable RS 232C max total length cable 500 m max 2 m e Method in which the RS 485 ports of multiple NT31 NT31Cs and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection via an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter page 86 This connection method is used with the RS 485 type NT link 1 N method standard or high speed 80 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Note Reference 5 1 1 Settings at the RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT AL001 Section 5 1 PT RS 232C RS422A convertor unit Host R
226. ht does not go off e For details on the screen saver function refer to 2 15 4 Screen Saver Function in the Reference Manual e Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31 NT31C In System Menu or System Installer mode this function is not started System Settings Section 6 9 Set the screen saver start up time by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode E MENU Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Screen Data Diep Calendar Check Press J next screen or T previous ail screen to display the second memory Wait Time asec switch setting screen Select Memory Switch TL fa Co ct pan 5 ct T Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF er Controller ESG P Print Method Tone MEMORY SWITCH gt Seta time in the input field to the right of 2 4 Screen Saver Start up Time screen Saver l PRS Display erased Each of the digits can be incremented or eee decremented by pressing the associated Start up Time and keys oO gt s fmin No Movemnet Hist Disp Method From New Data Resume Function OFF To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen pres
227. ibrary data into character strings Data areas in CS CJ series PLCs that were previously inaccessible can be accessed The data areas listed below can be accessed read written All banks in the EM area timer completion flags TU counter completion flags CU Work areas WR Task flags TK and the HR area You can set the data numeric values for multiple words in record units using the tabular elements on the PT screen and write these settings in a single operation to words on the host i e PLC or PT memory using a touch switch operation on the PT Unit Also multiple words of numeric data can be read from the host in one operation In this way groups of parameter settings can be edited at the PT Unit and written to or read from the host You can display the brightness and contrast adjustment screen using either the touch switch or commands from the host even while the PT is in opera tion 1 2 2 Comparison between NT31 and NT31C Two NT31 models the NT31 which is capable of versatile graphic displays and the NT31C which is also capable of color display are available The differences between the NT31 and NT31C are tabled below NT31 NT31C Type NT31 ST123 EV3 Beige NT31C ST143 EV3 Beige NT31 ST123B EV3 Black NT31C ST143B EV3 Black Display panel STN monochrome LCD display STN color LCD type type with white backlight with white backlight Beige and black are the front panel colors of each NT31
228. ill in effect 6 9 4 Setting the Buzzer Sound The NT31 NT31C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an instruction from the host or when an error occurs It is possible to set whether or not the buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches e ON The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs e OFF The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors occur e ERROR ON The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs 172 System Settings Section 6 9 The default factory setting is OFF Reference e There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer but this memory switch setting has the highest priority e For details on the buzzer refer to 2 15 5 Buzzer Function in the Refer ence Manual Set the buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Transmit Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Select Memory Switch it YUJI o D ERROA ON na desplay ON OFF ORY Sh ORY SWITCH Start up an l Wait Time Sec The setting option changes each time Key Press Sound ON the touch switch is pressed lt MEM 1 4 Printer Si Print Method Tone To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch
229. in accordance with the built in clock Displayed and set with Calendar Check in the MAINTENANCE MODE menu Programming Console function Executes functions equivalent to those of al C200H PRO27 E Programming Console for CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 EV1 only CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E and SRM1 C02 V2 only PLCs Executes functions as a Programming Console for CS CJ series PLC Device Monitor function The Device Monitor function can be used to change the PLC s operating mode read change words in the PLC s data areas and display the PLC s error log Compatible PLCs include the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E SRM1 and CS CJ series PLCs Mathematical function Up to 256 calculation expressions can be registered along with the screen data The calculation function reads the required data from numeral memory tables or host words executes the registered calculations and writes the results Arithmetic operators logic operators bit operators and comparative operators can be used Transmission System program Downloads the system program from the system installer functions transmission Downloads Upload the system program with a Memory Unit Screen data Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data from the transmission Support Tool Function for transmitting screen data to and from the Memory Unit History data Function for uploading display alarm history d
230. in the Screen Correct address setting by the Support Tool Memory Table No Error Memory table No is out of limit Correct the table No by the Sup port Tool Programming Console Error Setting of Programming Console Function is inadequate It can be caused by e This PLC does not support Pro gramming Console Function e Protocol mismatch Set the PLC to NT Link e PROGRAMMING CONSOLE is connected to PLC Programming Console Error Programming Console Function does not RUN It can be caused by e Connecting cable is faulty e PROGRAMMING CONSOLE is connected to PLC e Protocol mismatch between the PT and PLC Set the PLC to NT Link bits set with the Support Tool are incorrect The memory table number set with the Support Tool is outside the range for the number of mem ory tables set in the system mem ory The communications settings are Set the communications method communica incorrect tions port as follows when using the Programming Console function e With C series PLCs 1 1 NT Link e With CS CJ series PLCs 1 N NT Link standard or high speed Not all PLCs support the Programming Console function Check the model of the PLC you are using 6 12 Programming Console Function Either increase the number of memory tables in the System settings under PT Configuration at the Support Tool or set the memory table number again within the established range The PLC used
231. ing to the PLC The standard or high speed 1 N NT Link can be used The Programming Console function can be used only when the PT s unit num ber is set to 0 Only one Unit using the Programming Console function can be connected to each of the PLC s ports built in RS 232C port and peripheral port When using the Programming Console function make sure that the maximum unit number for the PT is set to O in the PLC Setup of the CS CJ series PLC With a CS CJ series PLC the Programming Console function cannot be used simultaneously at both the built in RS 232C port and peripheral port Further more the Programming Console function cannot be started at the RS 232C port while a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port 221 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 6 12 3 Method of Use The Programming Console screen is displayed by operating the system menu as described below Ver 4 12 Select Expansion Mode Select Programming Console The Programming Console screen is PROGRAMMING CONSOLF OMRON dis p aye d lt PROGRAM gt zal PASSWORD _ _ 2 ai Press the Programming Console sheet i a keys touch switches for the operation Ps Pol Press the Quit touch switch to exit the w ett screen MONTTOR RUN PROGRAM N P An error is displayed if a wrong communications protocol is selected or a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port 1 Wi
232. ion control 2 in the PLC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing Using the NT Link 1 N Compatible Host Units Method The only OMRON PLCs that can be connected using the NT link 1 N method are the CS CJ series CPU Units and the C series C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H and SRM1 With the CS CJ series PLCs it is also possible to connect a 1 N NT Link using a Serial Communications Board CS Series only or Serial Communications Unit 64 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Check the model and series of the PLC as well as the model of Serial Com munications Board or Unit being used before making the connections The Units that can be connected to the NT31 NT31C by the NT link 1 N method using the RS 232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table below PLC Series CPU Units with Built in CPU Units Connectable with Con NT Link Function Communications Board or nectable Unit to CS series CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 E v1 0 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 E v1 1 Ten He ASHISAN C81G CPU42H 43H 44H 1 CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 7 66H 67H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 4 CS1D CPU65H 67H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ series CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G CPU44 45 9 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H 3 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H H CPUGSH S6H 67HC3 CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 93 3 C series C200HE CPU42 Z E
233. ion 4 1 4 1 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Reference The method for connecting between the RS 232C port of the PT and the RS 232C port of the host is as follows The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PLCs By using the memory link method a connection can be made to any arbitrary RS 232 unit When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PLCs refer to the PLC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual VO60 E1 L Direct Connection Between The RS 232C Ports Using an RS 232C Cable page 73 This is the easiest connection method Depending on the host to which the connection is to be made it may be possible to use OMRON cables with con nectors NT31 NT31C Host LJ RS 232C cable max 15 m LH The CS CJ series CPU Unit cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT link method Use the 1 N connection NT link method instead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 64 or Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 69 4 1 1 Host Types and Settings The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS 232C ports of both Units and the settings to be made at the host are described here When Using the Host Link Method Compatible Host Units 46 Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the host link function built in In the CS CJ series or CQM1H PLCs the host link
234. ion Unit mounted 195 x 142 x 74 W x H x D mm Panel cutout dimensions 1847 9 x 131 25 mm Circle of panel pressure 1 6 to 4 8 mm Degree of protection Front panel Protection equivalent to oil proof IP65 NEMA4 Grounding D type grounding Ground to 100 Q or less 1 Version 2 V2 PTs 10 to 57 Hz with 0 075 mm amplitude and 57 to 150 Hz with 9 8 m s acceleration for 30 minutes each in X Y and Z directions 2 Application may not be possible in locations subject to long term exposure to oil 247 Specifications Appendix A Performance Specifications Display Specifications Specification NT31 ST123 EV3 NT31C ST143 _ EV3 Display Display device NT31 Monochrome STN LCD with backlight panel NT31C Color STN LCD with backlight Number of dots 320 dots horizontally x 240 dots vertically resolution Size of a stan 5 76mm dard character Effective dis 118 2 mm horizontally x 89 4 mm vertically 5 7 inches play area Display color NT31 Black white 2 colors NT31C 8 colors and intermediate colors can be displayed with tiling patterns Life expectancy 50 000 hours minimum until brightness reduced by half Contrast adjust Adjustable in 100 levels by operation at the touch panel ment Backlight Life expectancy At high brightness 50 000 hours minimum white cold See note o Replacement Cannot be replaced by the user Brightness Adjustable in 3 levels by touch switch operation at
235. is for a Duplex CPU Unit System The CS1W SCB21 42 V1 Serial Communications Board Cannot be used 2 Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect 3 The CQM1H CPU11 does not have a built in RS 232C port so connect to the peripheral port to the PT with a CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable 4 CPU Units of CVM1 CV series PLCs without the suffix EVO cannot be connected Settings at the Host When using the host link method the settings shown below must be made at the host depending on the Unit some of these settings may not be neces sary or settings not shown here may be necessary nm o s Parity 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method page 161 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT31 NT31C in a single host link The setting methods for each type of Unit are described in the following Connecting to a C series C200H C200HS C200HE HG HX Z E Rack mounting Unit C200H LK201 Host Link Unit V1 Setting the Front Switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following 48 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at
236. it Time asec switch setting screen Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF Controller ESC P Print Method Tone CMEMORY SWITCH gt Press Comm A Method to select Bar 4 4 Code Reader The setting option changes each time ee en the touch switch is pressed oO aa A ae 5 Comm B Select RS 232C Comm B Method None KMEMORY SWITCH i i til quiti Press the Set touch switch to the right of 4 4 Comm A Method Comm A Method Bar code Reader Set Comm B Select RS 232C Comm B Method None Display the required setting for each item by pressing the touch switches Comm Port A Bar Gode Reader The setting option changes each time the Data Bit Comm Length 7 bits obps touch switch is pressed Stop Bit Input Length 1 bit Method Puto elke None Press Quit Comm Port A Bar Code Reader Data Bit Comm A Bit 7 bite g60IRbps Stop Bit Input Length 1 bit Method Auto Pari ty l giti None Pressing Abort on the communications condition confirmation method setting screen causes the NT31 NT31C to return to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 without executing setting with the previous settings still effec tive System Maintenance Section 6 11 On completion of communications condition confirmation method setting the NT31 NT31C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen
237. k ele tacks caedasacksaeedays 241 7 4 Amspecuon and lt leaning 2 gexec dundee cote eid weet eee ud eRe Ret anee eas 245 Appendices Ae SSPCCIMCAMONS verrine oie oe Fad oats a shsea net wate eae ea nig a tee ee 247 B Dimens Ons eaa e ce a en re ee 255 C Using anRS2232C RS 2D A Adapter oerein ee ches pean TE AA A A 259 D Transporting and Storing the NT31 NT31C 2 0 ene 265 E Makino He Cable eerder anran e a A NEEE E EEEN 267 F Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC 0 0 0 nes 269 G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader 0 00 00 ee eee 271 H Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer 20 2 0 ccc nee 273 I Relationship between System Program and Hardware 0 0 0 0 cece eee 215 E OTE ce crane EA E E E E e Berane Enea ee ge hee Gott ek Saat 279 Ko ODOM E 4 06 00 as seer eee oes Geet i et Ohtake eae mine r ks 285 MERON goed aps coveted aug eee SSR ORR ERE LOU Revision History 60462440600 6555 teu ed oweeeeteenecie 293 Vill About this Manual This manual describes connecting the NT series NT31 and NT31C Programmable Terminals to a PLC Programmable Controller or other host and peripheral devices and the settings required for communi cations and applications It includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the Programmable Terminal Section 1 pro
238. lamps In accordance with the status of the host bit they can be lit displayed in reverse video or flashed repeated alternation between normal and reverse video display states Lamps can also display different image library data for the ON and OFF states of the host bit such lamps are called image library lamps There are four standard lamp labels fixed display character strings ON OFF switching character strings numeral displays and character string displays When fixed display character strings or ON OFF switching character strings are used several lines of labels can be displayed ne Unlit state Lit state Normal Standard Lamps Image Library Lamps on Unlit state Lit state These switches can be set at any location on the screen Pressing a touch switch on the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the follow ing effects e Notification to a host bit input notification function e Changing the displayed screen screen switching function e Input of a numeric value or character string input key function e Copying of a numeric value or character string copy key function e Shifting to another numeric value or character string input field Cursor moving key function e Obtaining a hard copy of the screen screen print function e Opening Closing a window e Moving a window Touch switches can be made to light or flash in accordance with the status of a host bit in the same way as lamps
239. ler PC is used however in some Program ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Jed 4 cb OF 1 Od WL 6h ee re eae ee ee mtended Adice NCE praeceps eaaa el DeRose ee Ge hae de Go Rot le be tebe ihe baie heath betel General Preca OS 5c bose bcc seve he eet ew ees ae ee Gk er Bi Orr Gdn ested Sahel PreCAUUONS 2 aa Nendo ees eae bee
240. lization 6 4 5 Initializing tion the initial values of the screen the Memory Tables page 147 data memory are not written to the If the resume function does not need to be used use memory tables the NT31 NT31C with the resume function OFF 6 9 10 Setting the Resume Function page 182 The numeral memory table is speci Calculations are executed continuously while the PT fied as the destination for a mathe is operating and the calculation results are automati matical table s results cally written to the memory table Specify another numeral memory table or a word in the host Updating of numeric val Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the ues and text is delayed conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 There are too many numeral text dis Reduce the number of numeral text displays on the plays on the displayed screen screen for which updating is delayed The cycle time is extended due to Shorten the host cycle time heavy processing at the host In an RS 422A 485 connection there Wire correctly by referring to SECTION 5 Connecting is illegal branching or an erroneous to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port terminator setting 233 Troubleshooting Section 7 1 ei Some of the elements The quantity of read data exceeds the Check the maximum number of elements by referring arranged on a normal stipulated restriction to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of t
241. m uto returni OFF a fa The setting option changes each time me out Intervall lsec the touch switch is pressed Retry Courts To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 185 System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 12 Setting the Time out Interval 186 Reference The NT31 NT31C goes into the time out error status if no response is received from the host within a fixed time The Time out Interval setting speci fies the time lapse at which time out is judged to have occurred The setting range is 1 to 10 seconds The default factory setting is 1 second Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time out error occurs is de termined by the setting for the Comm Auto return memory switch Set the time out interval by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Quit PT Setti
242. m a Programming Device Programming Console or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device CX Programmer to the CPU Unit For details on the PLC Setup refer to the CS series Operation Manual W339 or the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W393 Using the CPU Unit s Built in RS 232C Port Host link mode data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity Communications speed 9600 bps Communications speed 19200 bps Unit 00 Host link mode data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity Communications speed 9600 bps Communications speed 19200 bps m0 oo Unit 00 Setting the Front Switches Set the CPU Unit s DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31 NT31C is connected to An example of a CS series CPU Unit is shown below RUN ERR ALM INH PRPHL COMM OMRON PROG SMAC CS1G I DIP switches inside the battery storage e Set SW4 to ON establishing communications in MCPWR m accordance with PLC Setup when connecting the NT31 NT31C to the peripheral port e Set SW5 to OFF establishing communications in accordance with PLC Setup when connecting the NT31 NT31C to the RS 232C port 232C unit This also supports the CX Programmer Connecting to CS series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS 232C port for CS series CPU Units CS1W SCB21 V1
243. m oldest record 1 0530 2109 Proccess 1 Stopped 11 2604 1833 Proccess 1 Stopped 12 0604 2106 Conveyor Stopped 13 0604 2152 Conveyor Stopped E i Oo Comment p If required press Prt to print the display 1 0524 441 Conveyor Stoppe i 9 0524 0806 Temp Low Level i history record data 3 0524 841 Proccess 2 Stopped 4 524 841 Proccess 1 Stopped 5 524 0849 Conveyor Stopped 6 524 1521 Conveyor Stopped 7 526 844 P S Low Voltage 8 0527 1732 Conveyor Stopped 9 527 1125 Temp Low Level 1 0530 2109 Proccess 1 Stopped 11 2604 1833 Proccess 1 Stopped 12 0604 2186 Conveyor Stopped 13 0604 2152 Conveyor Stopped 201 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Yo VUNE sily Comment if i 1 524 441 Conveyor Stopped 2 524 0806 Temp Low Level Quit Press Quit 3 0524 0841 Proccess 2 Stopped The NT31 NT31C returns to the ALARM 4 524 841 Proccess 1 Stopped 5 524 849 Conveyor Stopped 6 524 1521 Conveyor Stopped 7 526 844 P S Low Voltage HISTORY MENU screen 8 527 1732 Conveyor Stopped 9 527 1125 Temp Low Level 1 0530 2109 Proccess 1 Stopped 11 604 1833 Proccess 1 Stopped Pri 12 0604 2106 Conveyor Stopped r 13 0604 2152 Conveyor Stopped oo to Example Print out All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently displayed screen Example Sort by occurrence method from oldest record Comment YY MM DD HH MM 01 01 Remote I O Error 98 02 06 16 02 PIC Unit E
244. ming that all the tests in 8 can be executed normally start opera tion 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery The NT31 NT31C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents 243 Maintenance of the NT31 NT31C Section 7 3 244 1 2 3 Reference The battery life is about 5 years if the NT31 NT31C is used in a location where the ambient temperature is 25 C If the temperature at the location of use is higher than this the battery life will be shorter Change the battery at suitable intervals in accordance with the operating environment of the NT31 NT31C It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced immediately when replacement becomes necessary Battery Type 3G2A9 BATO8 for both NT31 and NT31C Guide to Replacement Replace the Battery in the following cases If the power supply to the PT is left turned OFF after a low battery voltage has been detected the memory backed up by the battery may be corrupted Replace the Battery within 5 minutes of turning OFF the power supply to the PT e When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery e When the RUN LED is lit in orange during operation or in red when stopped e When the message The voltage is lowered is displayed on switching on the power or resetting the NT31 NT31C e When The voltage is lowered is displayed in the Battery check in the bat tery check menu of the Maintenance mode Battery Replacement Method Repla
245. mmunications Board or CS1W SCU21 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required 3 A CS1W SCU21 V1 Serial Communications Unit is required A CS1W SCB21 41 V1 Serial Communications Board cannot be used 4 One of the following Communications Units is required CJ1W SCU21 41 V1 Settings at the Host The Settings required for each Unit are described below m Connecting CS CJ series CPU Units CS CJ series CPU Unit CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CS1G H D CPULILIH CJ1G M CPULILJ CU1G H CPULILJH Connect to the built in RS 232C port on the CPU Unit A special Peripheral Port Connecting Cable CS1W CN118 can be used to connect to the periph eral port PLC Setup When connecting to a CS CJ series CPU Unit set the following communica tions conditions for the PLC Setup area in accordance with the communica tions port to be used Using the CPU Unit s Built in RS 232C Port Word WritingValue Sens 8200 NT link 1 N mode 000A Communications baud rate high speed L The largest model number of the con nected PT 0 7 Using the CPU Units Peripheral Port MEEA Writing Value Settings a NT link 1 N mode 145 000A Communications baud rate high speed soo oooL L The largest model number of the con nected PT 0 7 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 When connecting PTs with model numbers 0 2 3 4 and 5 to the built in RS 232C port for example set the value 8200 Hex to wo
246. mory Switches 0000005 149 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode 000 cee eee 150 6 5 1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode 151 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program 151 6 5 3 Changing the System Settings 0 0 00 c eee 153 654 Cleanne Screen Data 6 4 5 3 nh cans oe wb he 6S See we Whew es She awd 154 6 6 Transmitine the Screen Data lt i eremie ohara tianara r heane hea 155 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches 158 6 7 1 About Communications Conditions 000 ees 159 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method 00005 161 6 7 3 Setting the NT Link 1 1 Method 163 6 7 4 Setting the NT Link 1 N Method Standard High speed 164 6 7 5 Setting the Memory Link Method 005 166 6 7 6 Setting the Communications Type for Serial Port B 168 G28 Startins Operon s oretcawee st ntindes are e bin keke ahead 169 6 9 System SENES sw esc uae deta esky eee ee a ee ae Se E 169 6 9 1 Memory Switch Setting Screens 0 anaana nnn 170 6 9 2 Setting the Start up Wait Time 0 0 00 171 6 9 3 Setting the Key Press Sound 0 0 000 eee 171 6 9 4 Setting the Buzzer Sound 0 0 eee 172 6 9 5 Setting the Printer Controller 000 0 eee 173 6 9 6 Setting the Print Method
247. mory link Memory Link Method page 72 When making a connection between RS 232C and RS 422A 485 ports using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter set the DIP switches on the NT ALOO1 as fol lows 81 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Slolelol MAA Example the terminal resistor is active RS 422A NT link 1 N PRE 1 sz 5 6 Built in terminal resistor setting DIP SW1 2 If at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable set this switch to ON to activate the built in terminal resistor If not at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable set this switch to OFF to inactivate the built in terminal resistor 2 wire type 4 wire type selection DIP SW1 3 SW1 4 For RS 422A set both of these switches to OFF 4 wire type For RS 485 set both of these switches to ON 2 wire type Selection of RS 422A 485 send mode DIP SW1 5 SW1 6 For host link or NT link 1 1 set both of these switches to OFF Always send For NT link 1 N set SW1 5 to OFF and SW1 6 to ON Sends when CS is H Note Read the manual supplied with the NT ALOO1 carefully before using the Unit 5 1 2 1 1 Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the Host The connection method in which the RS 422A 485 port of an NT31 NT31C and the RS 232C port of a host are connected via an Adapter is described here An RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT ALOO1 is used to convert between the RS 232C and RS 422
248. munications Board as shown below 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the settings are written they become effective by turn ing the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or executing the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the set tings are shown Allocated DM Setting Contents Area words DM32010 8000 Host link mode 2 stop bits data length 7 bits even parity Connecting to a CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit CS CJ series Rack mounting Units CS1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 and port 2 are both RS 422A 485 ports CJ1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 and port 2 are both RS 422A 485 ports CJ1W SCU41 V1 Port 1 is an RS 422A 485 port Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit using the rotary switches on the front of the Unit Set the number or symbol in the setting dis play window in the following way using a flat blade screwdriver When using a CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit set the switches as shown below 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A Terminating resistance switch TERM ON te
249. n Manual V061 E1 L e When the system program is cleared by mistake it becomes impossible to use the NT31 NT31C at all Check that the system installer is installed at the Support Tool side before deleting the program However note that the registered screen data and memory switch settings are retained e It becomes possible to install the system program inside the Memory Unit automatically by installing the Memory Unit at startup Refer to 3 5 Using a Memory Unit Clear install the system program by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below 151 Operations in the System Installer Mode Clearing the System Program Menu Exit System Installer Download System Program Change System Settings Download System Program Erase System Program Are you sure Return to Menu Yes Section 6 5 Select Download System Program Select Yes The system program is cleared During clearance the message Erasing is displayed e If Return to Menu is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the System Installer mode menu without clearing the system program e If clearance fails a screen asking whether you wish to try again is dis played On completion of system program clearance the NT31 NT31C enters the standby status for downloading of the system program Downloading the System Program System Installer V Download System Program Ready for downloading Download
250. n OMRON installed Install the correct system program The Device Monitor func The communications settings are not Set the communications method as follows when tion cannot be used correct using the Device Monitor function With C series PLCs 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link With CS CJ series PLCs 1 N NT Link standard or high speed The PLC does not support the Device Not all PLCs support the Device Monitor function Monitor function Check the model of PLC you are using Refer to 6 73 Device Monitor Function for details The system program installed in the The Device Monitor function can be used only when PT is fora PLC maker other than the PT is connected to a PT with the system program OMRON for OMRON PLCs installed Install a system program that supports the Device Monitor function The memory table display Since the memory table is allocated When the contents of the memory table are set as a contents differ from the ini to the host memory the display is fixed value do not allocate the memory table to the tial value set at the Sup updated in accordance with the con host port Tool tents of the host memory The battery voltage has dropped and Replace the battery and execute memory table initial the data in the memory table has ization 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery page 243 and been destroyed 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables page 147 Since ON is set for the resume func Execute memory table initia
251. n after flash memory memory for storing clearing the screen data or transmitting screen screen data has reached the end data several times contact your OMRON service of its service life center Hardware fault or system pro gram error Set the calendar clock again from the System Menu If the problem recurs delete the program in the System Installer mode then re install the program 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program page 151 If this does not solve the problem contact your OMRON service center 237 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 Tool Transmit Error x Error detected while down loading by the following case e faulty connecting cable e corrupted data by noise Malfunction due to external noise Malfunction due to external noise Tool Transmit Error Check Sum Error occurs while downloading by the following case e corrupted data by noise Tool Transmit Error Time out Error occurs while down loading by the following case e faulty connecting cable Tool Transmit Error Reception was failed by Buffer Over Flow Error The connecting cable is defective The connecting cable is defective The receive buffer has overflowed Check the cable connection and perform a con ductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable Appendix F Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring
252. n data page 140 e Initializing memory tables page 147 e Initializing memory switches page 149 e Initializing display history record data page 142 e Initializing alarm history record data page 144 e Initializing recipe tables page 146 Reference If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the System Setting setting in the System Installer mode memory initialization is not possible 6 4 1 Clearing Screen Data Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT31 NT31C cannot be started up correctly This operation clears initializes only the screen data and contents of the mathematical tables The memory switch settings and display history alarm history record data are retained Reference e When this function is used all of the screen data contents registered in the NT31 NT31C up to that point are cleared Check that the created screens are backed up at the Support Tool before using it e The screen data can be cleared in the System Installer mode too page 154 e The following types of data can be initialized individually Contents of numeral character string memory tables page 147 Memory switch settings page 149 Display history record data page 142 Alarm history record data page 144 140 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below SYSTEM MENU l l Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Mai
253. n directly onto the screen Circle Arc Sector Polyline Polygon Rectangle ft XX A continuous straight line with A polygon with up to 255 up to 256 points can be drawn vertices can be drawn Marks are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots that can be used as characters They can be used as custom characters within character strings Image data are graphics comprising any required area of dots They are regis tered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on the screen Windows bit map BMP data can be used for images There is a two color mode in which the display color and background color of the image are specified when it is registered in a screen and an eight color mode in which colors are assigned to the image in advance Since image data is composed of dots it requires a large data size but offers great powers of expression Library data are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single graphic They are registered in advance and as many as required can be dis played at any position on the screen Since it is generated by combining graphics library data has a small data size Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 Lamps Touch Switches Mark Image data Library data a a These are graphics whose display status changes in accordance with the states of bits at the host Squares circles sectors and polygons can be used for lamps normal standard
254. nce Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU a Display the fourth memory switch screen by Startap pressing the J next screen or T previous akg ees asec screen touch switch Key Press Sound ON Printer 0p Print Method Tone Select Memory Switch Press the touch switch corresponding to the port at which the NT link 1 1 method is to be set Comm A Method or Comm B Method to display the setting option NT Link 1 1 Comm A Method Host Link 4 4 Comm B Select RS 232C Comm B Method None The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 163 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 4 Setting the NT Link 1 N Method Standard High speed 164 Set the communications conditions for the NT link 1 N method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the Sys
255. nction The status and memory table contents of the NT31 NT31C immediately before its operation is stopped can be stored while operation is stopped or while the power is off and then displayed on the screen again when operation is restarted Screen saver function This function serves to extend the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen Clock function The time can be displayed in accordance with the internal clock data Programming Console function The PT can perform the same operations as a C200H PRO27 E Programming Console when the PT is connected to a CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E or SRM1 PLC in a 1 1 NT Link connection or a CS CJ series PLC ina 1 N NT Link connection Device Monitor function When the PT is connected to a PLC in a 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link the PT can be used for operations such as changing the PLC s operating mode displaying or changing the PVs of words or reading the error log System program install function The system program of the NT31 NT31C can be changed by using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool NT ZJ3AT1 ZJCAT EV2 It can also be installed by using a memory unit NT MF261 Screen display history function alarm history function The screen display history function records the time at which specific screens are displayed and the number of times they are displayed The alarm history function records the time at which
256. ncy display panel 248 Life expectancy touch panel 249 M Maintenance Mode 136 Making the cable 267 Making the cable for connecting a PLC 269 Making the cable for connection to a bar code reader 271 Making the cable for connection to a printer 273 Manual transmission memory unit 41 Manuals 22 Memory initialization 140 Memory link method 72 115 Memory switch 158 Memory switch setting screen 170 Memory unit 287 Menu tree 137 Mounting dimensions 256 N Noise resistance 247 NT link 17 NT link 1 1 method 61 NT link 1 N method 64 109 high speed 69 113 NT ALOO1 259 Number of dots 248 Number of switches touch panel 249 O Operating ambient humidity 247 Operating ambient temperature 247 Operating environment 247 Operating force 249 Operation at startup 133 Index Operation modes 135 P Peripheral devices that can be connected 15 Power consumption 247 Power input terminals 28 POWER LED 27 Power supply connection 31 precautions xv Precautions to be observed when transmitting screen data 157 Principal functions of NT31 NT31C 8 Printer cable 284 Printer connector 28 Programming console function 219 Programming environment 249 Protective sheet 285 PT 279 PT Memory 19 R Rated power supply voltage 247 Recipe function 6 Recommended printers 34 Relationship between system program and hardware 275 Relationships among modes 135
257. nection there is no mode change with the NT Link method 232 Troubleshooting Section 7 1 oy er The graph display does not One of the percentage display set Set the 100 0 and 100 values in the following tings 100 0 or 100 is relationship incorrect 100 value lt 0 value lt 100 value The trend graph display The cycle for graph display update Delete other elements on the same screen as the does not agree with the processing is longer than the set trend graph that are allocated to the host and have a actual time axis sampling cycle high update frequency Or lengthen the sampling cycle The Programming Console The communications settings are Set the communications method as follows when function cannot be used _ incorrect using the Programming Console function With C series PLC 1 1 NT Link With CS CJ series PLC 1 N NT Link standard or high speed A Programming Console is con It is not possible to use a Programming Console and nected the Programming Console function at the same time Disconnect the Programming Console The PLC does not support the Pro Not all PLCs support the Programming Console func gramming Console function tion Check the model of PLC you are using 6 12 Programming Console Function The system program for other ven The Programming Console function can be used only dor s PLCs has been installed PLC when the system program for OMRON PLCs is models other tha
258. ng Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or execu tion of the STUP command In the following table the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area and settings are shown m DM 30000 100 x unit number Allocated DM Setting Contents Area words 000A Baud rate high speed OOOL The highest unit number of the connected PTs 0 to 7 With the memory link method the connection can be made to a personal computer and an FA computer with RS 422A When connecting to the host with the memory link method it is necessary to create a program for the memory link at the host side 115 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 The following are the communications conditions that can be used with the memory link method For the host a personal computer an FA computer etc its setting should be compatible to one of the communications condi tions listed in the following table Set the same communications conditions at the NT31 NT31C by the memory switch page 166 tem o soga 5 2 2 Direct Connection between RS 422A Ports at Both Units The connection method in which the RS 422A ports of an NT31 NT31C and a host are connected is described here Host link CPU Unit Communications
259. ng the next screen and previous screen touch switches The four memory switch setting screens are shown below lt MEMORY_SWITCH gt 1 4 Start up Wait Time Key Press Sound Buzzer Sound Printer Controller Print Method 4 next screen tl f previous screen MEMORY SWITCH gt 4 4 Comm A Method Comm B Select Comm B Method Host Link RS 2320 None f previous screen Asec CMEMORY SWITCH gt li lay erased 4 next screen ON Screen Saver Start up Time OFF g __ Amin No Movemnet f previous screen ESC P Hist Disp Method From New Data next won f f previous screen lt MEMORY SWITCH 3 4 ime out Intervall flsec next screen lt t _______ Retry Counts Memory Switch Settings A list of the memory switch settings is presented below e Start up Wait Time page 171 e Key Press Sound page 171 e Buzzer Sound page 172 e Printer Controller page 173 e Print Method page 175 e Screen Saver Movement page 176 e Screen Saver Start up Time page 178 e Hist Disp Method page 180 e Resume Function page 182 e Comm Auto return page 184 e Time out Interval page 186 e Retry Counts page 187 e Comm A Method page 159 For the bar code reader refer to page 189 e Comm B Select e Comm B Method For details on each setting refer to the pages indicated 170 page 168 page 159 System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 2
260. ng the High speed NT Link 1 N Method Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary switch located on the front panel Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the fol lowing Set the unit number to O through F so that it will not overlap with the numbers used in other units Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or execu tion of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown m DM30000 100 unit number CH Algomed Di Arga words DM Area words eat eae Setting Contents m 1 m 11 0000 to 0009 1 eee baud rate stan dard m 16 O000L L The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex Compatible Host Units The high speed 1 N NT Link method can be used with version 1 V1 and high speed versions H of the CS s
261. ngs Expansion Mode Select Memory Switch Memory Switch Alarm History Calendar Check 1 0 Check lt MEMORY_ SWITCH gt Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the third memory Start up Time Adeec switch setting screen Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF Controller ESC P Print Method Tone lt MEMORY_SWITCHD Press Time out Interval to display the Quit 3 4 required time lapse OFF Comm Auto return Ee ae 3 a 5 The setting option changes each ime out Interval lsec time the touch switch is pressed i according to the following sequence 01 02 03 09 10 01 Retry Counts To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting System Settings Section 6 9 e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 13 Setting the Retry Count Reference The NT31 NT31C does not immediately display an error screen when a com munications error occurs but tries to re establish communications The
262. ngs is also described Front View POWER LED Lit in green when the power is supplied RUN LED Display e Lit in green while the unit The NT31 has a monochrome is in the RUN mode LCD screen with a backlight and i the NT31C has an STN color e Lit in orange or red when l i the battery is low orange LCD screen with a backlight in the RUN mode red in The whole area of the screen is a other modes touch panel which works as an input device Reference The NT31 NT31C comes in two body colors NT31 NT31C Body Color NT31 ST123 EV3_ NT31C ST143 EV3 NT31 ST123B EV3__ NT31C ST143B EV3 27 Names and Functions of Parts Section 2 2 Rear View Battery cover The battery is secured underneath this cover Reset switch inside the cover Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT31 NT31C However registered data such as screen data and memory switch settings retain their statuses before initialization Expansion interface connector under the label When using an expansion interface unit such as a memory Grounding terminal to prevent connect it here malfunction due to noise Power input terminals Connect the power to the NT31 NT31C at these terminals Warning label Serial port A connector Connect the cable for connection to the host or Support Tool here A bar code reader can also be connected
263. nits to register it correctly e The power to the NT31 NT31C is interrupted or the NT31 NT31C is reset e The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is interrupted or the computer is reset e The cable connecting the NT31 NT31C to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire e The Quit touch switch on the NT31 NT31C screen is pressed to end screen data transmission e Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool 157 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 Note When transferring the data in units of screens if there are changes in memory table and or direct access transfer such data along with the screen data 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches The NT31 NT31C can be connected to the host by the following 7 types of communications methods can be used to communicate with a host e Host link e Memory link method e NT Link 1 1 e Mitsubishi A computer link method e NT Link 1 N e Mitsubishi FX method e High speed NT Link 1 N The NT31 NT31C has the following two ports either of which can be used for communications with the host depending on the requirements e Serial port A exclusively for RS 232C 9 pin connector e Serial port B RS 232C RS 422A selectable 25 pin connector The method for setting the communications method fo
264. nnection can be made to a personal com puter with RS 232 and an FA computer etc When connecting to the host in the memory link method it is necessary to create a program for the memory link at the host side Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 The following are the communications conditions that can be used in the memory link method For the host a personal computer an FA computer etc its setting should be compatible to one of the communications condi tions listed in the following table Set the same communications conditions at the NT31 NT31C by the memory switch page 166 tem Settings at the host Input Output port RS 232C Communications speed Data bits length 7 bits 8 bits Stop bits length 1 bits 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None RS CS XON XOFF 4 1 2 Connecting Directly between RS 232C Ports The method for connection between the RS 232C ports of the NT31 NT31C and the host is described here Host link unit CPU SYSMAC Bamana CS CJ series PLC C series PLC 5 Be CVM1 CV series d PLC SRM1 Serial port A RS 232C 9 pin type Mca Serial port B RS 232C 25 pin type 9 pin connector or 25 pin connector Cable with RS 232C connectors Recommended Connector Cable When making the connector cable as far as possible
265. ns speed Standard or for communications with the host high speed Setting The Conditions for Communications with The Memory Link Method Setting Page Options Data bits Set the data bits length 7 8 bits 166 Stop bits Set the stop bits length 1 2 bits Party Sette party Comm Speed Set the communications speed for 1200 2400 communications with the host 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Flow control Set the flow control and its None RS CS method XON XOFF Response Set whether the response is car Yes No ried out for normal process of communications command or not 159 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 Possible Combinations of The combinations of communications methods that can be set with the NT31 Communications Method NT31C are indicated in the table below Combinations other than these listed Settings below cannot be set when using a system for multi venders refer to the PLC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Man ual VO60 E1 1 Serial port A Serial portB 0 SeriaportA O Host Link NT Link NT Link Bar code Memory z 1 o N n m None ides Link 1 N x x x x eae or high speed a Q Possible combination x Impossible combination Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set Reference When using serial port B for communications with the host and serial port A for the transmission of sc
266. ns with the host The RUN mode is established and operation starts in accordance with the screen data in the NT31 NT31C When changing the settings or checking the statuses perform the appropriate operation by displaying the System Menu For details on displaying the Sys tem Menu refer to 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu page 138 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 6 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu The NT31 NT31C operates in four modes the RUN Transmit Maintenance and Expansion modes These modes are selected from the System Menu In addition the NT31 NT31C also features the System Installer mode which is used specifically for installing the system program The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the NT31 NT31C power is switched ON 6 3 1 Relationships among Modes The relationships among the System Menu each of the operation modes and the System Installer mode are indicated in the figure below For details on system menu operation refer to 6 3 3 Operations with the Sys tem Menu page 138 Transmit Mode RUN Mode This is the mode in which the NT31 NT31C operates In this mode the NT31 NT31C can be controlled from the host and various display and I O operations are possible In this mode screen data and other data are transmitted between the Support Tool and the NT31 NT31C To change system settings or screen d
267. nsmitting the same system program or screen data to multiple NT31 NT31C this mode becomes convenient When data is written to the NT31 NT31C the data that has been stored up until that point is lost When the system program is changed the operation of NT31 NT31C also changes Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the Memory Unit to the NT31 NT31C by automatic transmission 1 Check that the NT31 NT31C power is OFF then set the DIP switches on the Memory Unit as follows after installing Memory Unit to NT31 NT31C SW2 4 ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously OFF System Screen not transmitted simultaneously SW2 3 ON Bank 1 OFF Bank O SW1 4 ON System program OFF Screen data It is not strictly necessary to set SW2 2 to OFF to disable writing to the Memory Unit but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors e Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously dis ables the setting of SW1 4 Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously dis ables the setting of SW2 3 In this case the data transmission becomes possible only if the data inside Memory Unit is in either of following combi nations Bank 0 system program Bank 1 other than system program Bank 0 other than system program Bank 1 system program Using a Memory Unit Reading and Writing Data by Manual Transmission Reference 1 2 3
268. ntenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENUT Select Memory Init wit PT Settings Menory Init Display Hisory temory Switch Alarm History 1 0 Settings Screen Data Disp Calendar Check 170 Check Select Screen Data Alarm History Memory Table Select Yes Erase Screen Data The screen data is cleared During clearance the message Erasing Now is displayed If No is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without clearing the screen data On completion of screen data clearance the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen After the screen data has been cleared if an attempt is made to set the NT31 NT31C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from the Support Tool or Memory Unit an error message will be displayed and the RUN mode will not be established 141 Memory Initialization 6 4 2 142 Section 6 4 Initializing Display History Record Data Reference The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of the screens displayed during operation and the number of times each screen is displayed These records are kept only for screens for which the History attribute has been set The maximum number of records is 1024 for sort by occurrence order of dis play occurrence and 255 for sort by frequency order of the number of times each screen has been displayed Use the display history record initialization function to
269. o the host and start operation Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before using them If incorrect the system may operate unpredictably Press the Quit touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen The NT31 NT31C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation The operation at the start is as follows Display of The System Initialization Screen When establishing the communications with a host the System initializing character string is displayed on the screen If the communications with the host cannot be established the System initializing screen remains up If this is the case check the settings at the host and the PT side the cables and wir ing In addition creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a screen other than the System initialization screen Transmission of The Contents of Memory Tables If the Resume Function memory switch is set to ON or if the initial values of the memory tables are used the contents of the numeral character string memory tables are copied to the allocated words at the host l Display of The Startup Screen The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents screen number of the screen to be displayed of the first word of the PT status control area If the contents are not correct for a screen number or there is no data regis tered for the set screen number an error message is displayed Execute the host program and confirm that the f
270. od ers sisc2 c484ieeudneedsieawsneaw steed 35 3 4 2 Setting a Bar Code Reader ic acs avwe gatad tad ae head hak eee ee 35 92429 Data FOMMAC aeee Ea Sewn eho E eee E eee 36 3 5 Using a Memory UMl g aco ced aout toate owed Aiea ead ee he wadieey es 36 3 5 1 Installation Method yc 0 5 3c ais cactknd oe re eek eee es 37 S252 INICHOGOl USC ais r bao each aed ate charac 38 29 Installation Section 3 1 Note On unpacking the NT31 NT31C and peripheral devices check their external appearance and confirm that there is no damage Also confirm that there is no abnormal noise on shaking the PT lightly 3 1 Installation Install the NT31 NT31C in the operation panel and connect the power to the NT31 NT31C as described below 3 1 1 Installation Environment Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel Note 1 Do not install the PT at sites subject to the following conditions e Severe temperature variations e Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifica tions e High humidity condensation e Splashing chemical agents e Severe oil splashing e Corrosive or flammable gases e Strong vibrations or shocks e Direct exposure to wind and rain outdoor sites e Strong ultra violet irradiation 2 Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the PT is used at a location subject to any of the following conditions e Static electricity or noise from other equipment e Strong electromagneti
271. odel The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded to the Memory Unit besides screen data When the data in the Memory Unit is written into the NT31 NT31C make sure that these set tings can be adapted to the NT31 NT31C used before transmission 3 5 1 Installation Method Install the Memory Unit NT MF261 at the expansion interface connector at the rear of the NT31 NT31C as shown in the figure below the expansion interface connector is located underneath the note label 37 Using a Memory Unit Section 3 5 Mounting screws 3 5 2 Method of Use As shown in the figure below a Memory Unit has two sets of four DIP switches and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup 7 2 m4 4 2 3 4 m a l oe a a ee E Factory setting is turned all to off OFF OFF Swi SW2 Note 1 Always confirm that the power to the NT31 NT31C is off before setting the DIP switches 2 Do not touch the PCB printed circuit board directly with bare hands DIP Switch Functions The functions of the DIP switches on the Memory Unit are indicated in the table below aan 1 Automatic transmission writing from the Memory OFF Not executed Unit to the PT ON Executed SW1 2 Automatic transmission writing from the PT to the OFF Not executed Memory Unit ON Executed Executed
272. of SW1 4 e Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously dis ables the setting of SW2 3 writes the system program into bank O and the screen data into bank 1 at all times 39 Using a Memory Unit Writing Screen Data to the PT Using Automatic Transmission Memory Unit to PT Reference 1 2 3 Reference 40 Section 3 5 2 Switch the NT31 NT31C power ON The screen data is automatically written into the Memory Unit The screen data in the NT31 NT31C is preserved The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing At the same time the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the means of the number of bytes and blocks 1 bank 16 block 1024k byte RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status Preparing flashes at intervals of 1 second Transmitting flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Verifying flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Finished lights up 3 Switch the NT31 NT31C power OFF remove the Memory Unit To operate NT31 NT31C continuously switch the NT31 NT31C power back ON In this mode the system program or screen data in the Memory Unit is forcibly written to NT31 NT31C irrespective of the setting status of the NT31 NT31C Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool or system installer is used it can save a lot of time When tra
273. ollowing operations are per formed normally e Confirm that the NT31 NT31C screens switch in accordance with the host program If the screens do not switch correctly check the connection between the host and the NT31 NT31C and also check if the hardware settings are correct For details refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port e Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value char acter string input at the NT31 NT31C are sent to the host correctly by dis playing the contents of the host words and bits using a Programming Device e g CX Programmer If the results of operations at the NT31 NT31C are not sent to the host correctly check the setting of the display elements For details on set ting display elements refer to the description of each display element in the Reference Manual 6 9 System Settings The NT31 NT31C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during operation to be set with memory switches This section describes the memory switch settings relating to the operation environment 169 System Settings Section 6 9 Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the battery in the NT31 NT31C they are not cleared when the power is switched OFF 6 9 1 Memory Switch Setting Screens There are four memory switch setting screens The required screen can be displayed by usi
274. ommu nications Board CPM1 e Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter CPM2A SRM1 e Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter e Connect to the peripheral port on a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter The CPM2C CN111 splits the Units communications port into a RS 232C port and a peripheral port Reference e There are no Communications Boards for the C200HX HG HE Z E in which port B is the RS 422A port e There are no Serial Communications Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is the RS 422A port 103 104 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 PLC Setup Area Settings When connecting to a C200HX HG HE Z E or CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1H CPU Units or SRM1 set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup area tem O soga C 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to refer to 6 7 2 Set ting the Host Link Method page 161 Set the PLC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device e g CX Programmer For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area refer to the manual for the PLC which is used The PLC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the Unit to which the connection is made are shown below When using port A of the Communications Board of C200HX HG
275. on 249 Specifications Appendix A pote Specifications OO O O O O O S Battery backup Backup of numeral character string memory table data in the NT31 NT31C Backup of display alarm history data Backup of calendar and clock setting Battery life 5 years at 25 C When voltage becomes low RUN LED lights in orange or red The communications flag to the PLC BAT LOW comes ON 1 Resume function Retains the contents of the numeral character string memory tables i e they are not initialized when the power is turned ON when the NT31 NT31C is reset and when the operation mode is changed Setting Set ON for Resume Function in the memory switch menu Screen print function Functions Prints a hard copy of the screen display Prints display alarm histories Setting Set the printing protocol Print Controller and printing type Print Method in the memory switch menu ESC P Color Color printing conforming to ESC P 24 J83C PC PR201H Color Color printing conforming to PC PR201PL ESC P Tone Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels conforming to ESC P 24 J82 PC PR201H Tone Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels conforming to PC PR201PL PCL 5 Tone Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels conforming to PCL 5 However the NT31 supports monochrome printing only Calendar and clock function Displays the current time
276. ons methods Host Link Unit CPU Unit CS CJ series PLC C200HX HG HE Z E Serial port B RS 422A 485 25 pin type RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT ALOO1 25 pin connector Relay terminal block RS 232C cable with lt C connectors RS 422A terminal 9 pin connector block RS 422A 485 cable max total length 500 m 86 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connecting an NT31 The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay ter DA and NT AL001 RS minal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below NT31 NT31C Hios RS 422A NT ALOO1 NT31 NT31C side Shielding wire oa N o QAE 422A 485 connector OOOWOOOO0O0O0GQ O O O O O O O O O O O 25 pin type Next PT For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 87 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connecting an NT31 The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay ter iy and NT AL001 RS minal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below NT31 NT31C NT ALOO1 Host
277. ontents of memory tables can be changed from the host Graph display Not only bar graphs but also broken line graphs trend graphs and analogue meter graphs can be displayed using numeral memory tables Lamp display Lamps can be turned on and flashed under the control of the host It is also possible to display different graphics in the ON and OFF states Alarm list history display Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host bit The time and the number of times of the messages appeared can also be displayed Functions relating to data output Buzzer A built in buzzer can be sounded Screen printing A hard copy of the currently displayed screen can be printed at the printer connected to the NT31 NT31C WAV AY Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 Functions relating to data input Input by touch switches Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen The possible functions of touch switches include sending data to the host and changing the screen display Inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when interlock bits have been allocated Pop up window function A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch switch In addition to fixed character and graphic displays control keys and character keys created as touch switches can also be set inside the window A m
278. ork eae ka ee te ee 1 2 3 SECTION 1 57 2 EEE E ee ee cer l 1 Role and Operation of the NT31 NT31C 1 2 Functions of the NT31 NT31C 1 3 System Configuration 1 4 Communications with the Host 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links 1 6 SECTION 2 Preparing for Connection eeeeeeee8egee oe e e e08e e08e8 amp e208e0600606062U lt zmPhmhUcrmW oe le le Method for Connection to the Host 2 1 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts Bere Opera avd icminyetet diesel cyte Seley pe eit oie 6 fds oeess TABLE OF CONTENTS XV xvi xvi 23 24 27 29 30 33 34 34 36 45 46 133 133 135 SECTION 3 Hardware Settings and Connections ccceeee Sol TnstallaiOnie s 3 eaves dans dae Se eh ee oe eka eee eae wale eeu wees 32 Connecuns tothe Support OOk rasteren aa neh teu ed ue heey Code ieee es 39 Connections a Printer 3 o 5 5 3 actos ote ih tects Bos are hod Rite fod tn Wh de oh ie ea re eh ie JA Gonnecting a Bar Code Reader 4 04 52ie ah te a adane Ped a aa heae peeks Jo JUsine a Memory Utility lt 2 seed ehh Caw ee Cake eine baled h REKA hele heey babs aes SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port 4 1 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host 2 0 nes SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port 5 1 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port 0 0 eee 5 2 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port 0 0 0 0 0 eee SECTION 6 System
279. orrectly in order to prevent operating errors due to noise Connecting to the Support Tool Section 3 2 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool In order to install the system program in the NT31 NT31C or to transmit screen data created with the Support Tool to the NT31 NT31C the NT31 NT31C must be connected to a personal computer with an RS 232C cable The NT31 NT31C connects the RS 232C cable from a personal computer at serial port A When the host is connected at serial port B the connection with the host can be maintained as it is while the NT31 NT31C is connected to the RS 232C cable from a personal computer However when a bar code reader is being used it must be disconnected so that the RS 232C cable can be connected since they both use serial port A EEE RE Serial port A RS 232C 9 pin Communications Conditions The communications conditions are automatically set when the system installer and Support Tool are started Recommended Connector Cable Use the cable indicated below e CV500 CN228 length 2 m made by OMRON D SUB 9 pin male lt D SUB 25 pin male e XW2Z S001 conversion cable made by OMRON D SUB 25 pin female lt half pitch 14 pin male e XW2Z S002 length 2 m made by OMRON D SUB 9 pin male lt D SUB 9 pin female For details on making a connector cable refer to Appendix F Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC
280. ors e For host link 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link 5 V power supplied from PLC XW2Z 070T 1 9 pin to 9 pin 0 7 m XW2Z 200T 1 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m SJ46006 102 9 pin to 9 pin 1 m SSJ46006 202 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m NT ALOO1 side PLC side connector connector 9 pin type 9 pin type 5 9 Since the CS1G H CQM1H and C200HX HG HE Z E have a 5 V out put no external power supply is required for the NT ALOO1 91 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 5 1 4 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals Note 92 Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS 232C When making an RS 232C connecting cable as far as possible use the rec ommended parts indicated in the table below Some Units come supplied with one connector and connector hood Check the required parts and prepare them in advance Name Modei Remarks Delivered with Connector XM2A 0901 9 pin type CS CJ series CPU Units Made by OMRON C series CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPU Units CV500 LK201 XM2A 2501 25 pin type C500 LK203 Made by OMRON 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C200H LK201 V1 DB 25P 25 pin type 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Pe iomon OLEV Connector XM2S 0911 9 pin type CS CJ series CPU Units hood Made by OMRON C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPU Units CV500 LK201 XM2S 0913 Made by OMRON 9 pin XM2S 0911 E Made by OMRON 9 pin CS CJ series CS1G CS1H XM2S 2511 25 pin type C500 LK203 Made by
281. ose of them in accor dance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local au thority Reference Desire on replacing the NT31 NT31C When replacing the NT31 NT31C after discovering a fault during inspections note the following points e Be sure to switch the power OFF before starting replacement e After replacement check that the new NT31 NT31C is not subject to the same error e If a faulty PT is returned for repairs write as detailed a description of the fault as possible and send this description together with the PT to the OMRON address indicated on the back cover of this book 246 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications Specification NT31 ST1231 EV3 NT31C ST143L EV3 Rated power supply voltage 24 VDC Allowable power supply 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 to 10 voltage range Allowable power interruption No regulation time X Operating ambient tempera 0 to 50 C ture Storage ambient tempera 20 to 60 C ture Operating ambient humidity 35 to 85 with no condensation Operating environment Noise immunity Conforms to IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV power line Vibration resistance 5 to 9 Hz with 3 5 mm single amplitude and 9 to 150 Hz with 9 8 m s acceleration operating 10 times each in X Y and Z directions 1 octave min Shock resistance operating 147 m s 15G 3 times in each of X Y and Z directions Dimensions 195 x 142 x 54 W x H x D mm With Expans
282. ost in this check confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or Memory Unit before executing it e If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for System Settings in the System Installer mode it is not possible to execute a screen data check 209 System Maintenance Section 6 11 e Once a screen data check has been started it cannot be stopped Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU UI 1 0 Settings Screen Data Disp calendar Check 170 Check 1 0 CHECK MENU JI I F Check Device Check Select I O Check Select Device Check Select Screen Memory SCREEN MEMORY CHECK gt Warning If you execute this check then the screen data is erased Quit Press Execute e During the check the message Checking Now is displayed 210 System Maintenance Checking Touch Switches Section 6 11 e On normal completion of the check the message Memory Check OK is displayed e If an error is discovered in the check the message Memory Check NG is displayed After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT31 NT31C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select M
283. page 76 Serial Port A NT31 NT31C PLC host link unit T Pin R Pin ae Abbreviation number Shielding wire umber Abbreviation 2 hood RS 232C interface en EE cP aoc en 25 pin type oooo0oo0oo0o000000 DOUOOO0OO0000G y 13 25 For Units that have a CTS setting selector switch RS and CS do not have to be shorted if this switch is set to O V Serial Port B NT31 NT31C PLC host link unit oe Pin Abbreviation BG eonector FG hood 1 RS 232C interface 25 pin type ooooo0oo0oo000000 OOOO o0o0o0o0o000Q oooo0oo0o0000000 OOOO o0o0oo0o0o000Q psj O gt N N 13 25 25 pin type 75 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 For Units that have a CTS setting selector switch RS and CS do not have to be shorted if this switch is set to O V Wiring for Other Connections Applicable Units CV500 LK201 communications port 2 CS1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU21 V1 CPM1 10CDR L CPM1A 10CDLI L1 CPM1A 30CDLI 1 CPM2A 30CDLI 1 CPM2A 60CDL I _1 CPM2C 10UUIUIUILILI L CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV 1 CQM1H CPU11 CQM1H CPU51 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V 1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H CJ1G CPU44 45 CJ1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CJ1H CPU65H 66H 67H CJ1M CPU11 12 13 21 22 23 CJ1W SCU41 V1 CPM1 20CDR 0 CPM1A 20CDC 0 CPM1A 40CDL 0 CPM2A
284. pending on the Unit some of these settings may not be necessary or settings not shown here may be necessary tem O soga we o ooo SSS 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed memory switch at the NT31 NT31C For details refer to 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method page 161 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT31 NT31C in a single host link The setting methods for each type of Unit are described in the following Connecting to a C Series C200H C200HS C200HE Z E C200HG Z E C200HX Z E Host Link Unit Rack mounting Unit C200H LK201 V1 Setting the Front Switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following e Unit SW1 SW2 Set these switches to 0 BOIRO e Instruction level parity and transfer code SW4 ow D SW4 Set this switch to 2 e Communications speed SW3 Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps Setting the Rear Switches e Terminator setting Selector switch Set this switch to ON Terminator ON e 1 to 1 1 to N protocol selection selector switch Set this switch to 1 to N OFF 98 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 C1000H C2000H Rack mounting Unit 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Setting the Front Switches
285. please inquire whether or not protection is offered if the chemical agent is one against which silicone rubber is recognized as offering protection please use this product even if the agent is not listed in the Protects against column of the table above Replacement Battery 3G2A9 BAT08 This is a lithium battery used for memory backup 286 Option List Appendix K Memory Unit NT MF261 This is a dedicated unit for reading writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT31 NT31C Data is transmitted by DIP switch setting at the Memory Unit 287 Option List Appendix K 288 Index Numerics 1 N connection among RS 422A ports 121 1 N connection among RS 485 ports 124 1 N connection between RS 422A 485 at the NT31 NT31C and RS 232C at the host 86 A Allowable power supply voltage range 247 Applicable connectors 284 Automatic transmission memory unit 39 Backlight 241 Backlight brightness adjustment 193 Battery cover 28 Before operating 21 Brightness adjustment 248 C Cable connection dimensions 257 Cable for peripheral port of CS1 series PLC 284 Cables with connectors 283 Calling the System Installer mode 138 Calling the System Menu 138 Cell size Touch panel 249 Changing the system settings 153 Checking communications at serial ports 215 Checking communications with a printer 218 Checking communications with the Support Tool 214 Checking interfaces
286. pment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must con sult with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Termi nals to the above mentioned applications Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious damage is possible or for emergency switch applications Safety Precautions Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and cor rectly Safety Conventions and Their Meanings XVI N WARNING This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate cautions warnings and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NT31 31C The cautions warnings and dangers shown here contain important informa tion related to safety The instructions in these cautions warnings and dan gers must be observed Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Safety Precautions 3
287. quipped with a RS 232C port for CS series CPU Units CS1W SCB21 V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 Note Cannot be used with the CS1D CPU65H 67H Reference CS series Serial Communications Boards and Units with lot number 991220 December 20 1999 or later support the high speed 1 N NT Link method Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or execu tion of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown Aoested Ov Area wore DM Area words alocati Oy Area worse seting Setting Contents a DM32010 8200 NT link 1 N mode 71 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Alocate Ov Area morde DM Area words alocati ph Area worse seting Setting Contents Reference When Using the Memory Link Method 72 t DM32011 000A Communications baud rate high speed DM32006 DM32016 OO0OL The largest model number of the con nected PT 0 7 For example when connecting PTs with model numbers 3 4 5 and 6 to port 1 set the value 8200 Hex to DM32000 000A Hex to DM32001 and 0006 Hex to DM32006 Connecting to a CS CJ se
288. quivalent to oil proof IP65 and waterproof structure equiva lent to the NEMA4 standard The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil for long periods 320 dots gt 240 dots Wide angle of visibility Touch Switch Operation Contrast and brightness are adjustable by touch switch operations Compatibility with Other PTs e There is upward compatibility between the NT31 NT31C and the following models for screen data and user programs NT11S NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT610G NT610C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631 After being read to the Support Tool screens must be modified in accordance with the screen size Depending on the function used partial modification of programs may also be necessary For details on the com patibility of screen data refer to the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Pro grammable Terminal Reference Manual and the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual e The dimensions of the panel cut out to accommodate the NT31 NT31C are the same as for the NT30 NTS0OC Two Ports Featured as Standard Port A for Common Use by Support Tool Host and Port B for Exclusive Use by the Host e Communications with the host are possible via another port while con nected to the Support Tool e Reading bar code data from a bar code reader is possible via another port while communicating with the host Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section
289. r communications with the host is described here For details on setting the communications conditions for a bar code reader refer to 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Reference e Apart from the host it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a bar code reader to serial port A When a bar code reader is connected at serial port A the host must be connected at serial port B When serial port A is being used for communications with the host the host must be disconnected so that the Support Tool can be connected e There are four memory switch setting screens The conditions for commu nications with the host are set on the fourth screen the screen on which 4 4 is displayed For details on setting memory switches other than those for setting the conditions for communications with the host refer to 6 9 System Settings e When using the Mitsubishi A computer link method and Mitsubishi FX method a system program for multi venders is required Install the sys tem program to the NT31 31C by the system installer refer to page 151 For details refer to PLC Connection Manual V042 E1 L e When using PLCs manufactured by Allen Bradley GE Fanuc or Siemens refer to NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual VO60 E1 L 158 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 1 About Communications Conditions Items Set for The following settings are made for the communication
290. r details on the display history record function refer to 2 15 71 Display History Record Function in the Reference Manual e The order of display for sort by occurrence display from oldest record or from newest record is set with the Hist Disp Method memory switch page 180 e The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the Printer Controller page 173 and Print Method page 175 memory switches Display and print the display history record data by following the menu opera tion from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Select Display History Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Frequency Sort by Occurrence Sort by Frequency Scr DD nua comment If necessary select the next or previous tart i ee eee screen by pressing J next screen or T 44 0524 0841 Sector A previous screen o Got deat fe Si emp Setting 34 0504 0841 Temp Setting 3 The example screen to the left shows a a E EEH Nain Monitor display for the sort by occurrence ector 102 0612 1358 A Low Level method from oldest record 2 0612 1403 Main Monitor 45 0614 0851 Sector B 199 System Maintenance Section 6 11 T ST O04 aai Ag cae Peay 32 0524 0806 Temp Setting ilQui slor record data 44 0524 841 Sector 32 0524 841 Temp Setting 1 33 0524 841 Temp Setting 2 34 0524 841 Temp Setting
291. rd 160 OOOA Hex to word 161 and 0005 Hex to word 166 Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device Programming Con sole or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device CX Pro grammer to the CPU Unit For details on the PLC Setup refer to the CS series Operation Manual W339 or the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W393 Reference When using the CX Programmer to set the high speed 1 N NT Link set the communications baud rate to 115 200 bps Setting the Front Switches Set the CPU Unit s DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT31 NT31C is connected to An example of a CS series CPU Unit is shown below RUN ERR ALM INH OMRO Peripheral port i DIP switches inside the battery storage This is used mainly for 2 e Set SW4 to ON establishing communications in connection to the MCPWR I Ei BUSY accordance with PLC Setup when connecting the NT31 NT31C to the peripheral port e Set SW5 to OFF establishing communications in accordance with PLC Setup when connecting the NT31 NT31C to the RS 232C port Programming Device This also supports connection of RS 232C devices RS 232 port This is used mainly for connection of RS 232C devices This also supports the connection of CX Programmer Connecting to a CS series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board e
292. re shielded cable made by Fujikura Ltd CA MA VV SB 5Px28AWG Multi core shielded cable made by Hitachi Cable Ltd One XM2S 0911 for PT and either one XM2S 0911 or 0913 for your personal computer are needed 269 Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC Appendix F 270 Appendix G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader Refer to the following when making the cable for connection to a bar code reader Wiring Method NT31 NT31C side Bar code reader side When using the 5 V output of the NT31 NT31C limit the cable length to within 2 m If a cable longer than 2 m is used connect an external power supply to the bar code reader Connector and Related Parts Use the parts which are specified by bar code reader and following recommended products when making the connecting cable XM2A 0901 9 pin type made by OMRON PT side XM2S 091 1 9 pin made by OMRON Cable AWG28x5P IFVV SB Multi core shielded cable made by Fujikura Ltd CA MA VV SB 5Px28AWG Multi core shielded cable made by Hitachi Cable Ltd 271 Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader Appendix G 272 Appendix H Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer The following product is recommended as the cable for connecting a printer NT CNT121 made by OMRON cable length 1 5 m 20 pin 36 pin Refer to the following when making a cable for connection to a printer e Connector pin arrangement
293. reen data from the Support Tool set the settings of serial port A to None 160 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method Set the communications conditions for the host link method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU J Ver 4 12 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU JI Select Memory Switch lt MEMORY SWI TCH gt Me Display the fourth memory switch screen Sap by pressing the J next screen or T Wait Time sec previous screen touch switch Key Press Sound ON Printer ESC P Print Method Tone EPOR aL IUD Press the touch switch corresponding to the Qui a port at which the host link method is to be set Comm A Method or Comm B Method to Comm A Method Host Link display the setting option Host Link Comm B Select R3 232C The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed Comm B Method None 161 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 Press the Set touch switch to the right of the port at which the setting has been made res ee r In this example serial port A is used None Press the Comm Speed touch switch to display the communications speed to be set The setting option changes each time the ggmiabps touch switch is pr
294. regardless of the version of the system program installed in the PT PT Model Function of Memory Unit Without VL suffix The system program cannot be transferred using the Memory Unit With VL suffix The system program can be transferred using the Memory Unit By installing a Memory Unit NT MF261 on the NT31 NT31C the screen data in the NT31 NT31C can be recorded backed up in the Memory Unit In addition the screen data in the Memory Unit can be automatically read into the NT31 NT31C when it starts up This means that system program and screen data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool The data in the Memory Unit is retained without backup by a battery or other means Using a Memory Unit Section 3 5 In systems where there are frequent setup changes by preparing a number of Memory Units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with the control performed in each case the NT31 NT31C screen data can be changed simply by installing the Memory Unit without connecting to the Sup port Tool In addition even if NT31 NT31C is replaced the previous status can be main tained simply by installing the Memory Unit that retains the system program and screen data of the previous NT31 NT31C By using the following combinations data can be stored backed up to a Memory Unit e Screen data for two PTs e System program for two PTs e System program and screen data for
295. ries Serial Communications Unit A CS CJ series Rack mounting Unit CS1W SCU21 V1 CJ1W SCU21 V1 41 V1 CS series Serial Communications Boards and Units with lot number 991220 December 20 1999 or later support the high speed 1 N NT Link method Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary switch located on the front panel Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the fol lowing Set the unit number to 0 through F so that it will not overlap with the numbers used in other units Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or execu tion of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown Word m DM30000 100 x unit number Allocated DM Area words Setting Contents 8200 NT link CEN mode m 1 000A Communications baud rate high speed m 6 m 16 000L The largest model number of the con nected PT 0 7 In the memory link method the co
296. rminator ON terminating resistance enabled DM Area Allocation Settings From the Programming Device i e a Programming Console or CX Program mer write the settings directly to the CPU Unit s DM Area Setup Area After the settings have been written they will be enabled when the power supply is cycled the Unit is restarted the communications port is restarted or a STUP instruction is executed The DM Area words that are allocated and the contents of the settings are given in the following table Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Using the NT Link 1 1 Method m DM 30000 100 x unit number Allocated DM Setting Contents Area words m 10 8000 Serial communications mode Host Link Stop bits 2 Parity even Data length 7 bits m 1 m 11 Baud rate 9 600 bps a Baud rate 19 200 bps m3 Compatible Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the RS 422A type NT link 1 1 function built in e The C200HX HG HE Z E CPU Units can be connected by the RS 422A type NT link 1 1 method by installing a Communications Board e The CQM1H CPU Units can be connected by the RS 422A type NT link 1 1 method by installing a Serial Communications Board Check the model and series of the PLC against the model of CPU Unit before making the connections The Units that can be connected to the RS 422A port of the NT31 NT31C by the RS 422A type NT link 1 1 method are indicated in the table belo
297. roduct or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given 1X Related Manuals Related manuals are listed below The LI symbol at the end of the catalog number is the revision number Connecting and Setting Up the Programmable Terminal e NT31 and NT31C PT Setup Manual V062 E1 this manual This manual describes connecting the Programmable Terminals to a host and peripheral devices and settings required for communications and applications The functions and actual operating methods for the NT31 and NT31C PTs are provided in the Refer ence Manual V064 E1 L Programmable Terminal Functions and Operation e NT31 381C 631 631C PT Reference Manual V064 E1 This manual is used for any of the following PTs NT31 NT381C NT631 and NT631C It describes screen configurations part functions host control methods and other application information PT connection and setup procedures are described in the NT31 and NT31C PT Setup Manual V062 E1 L Creating and Transferring Screen Data and Installing the System Program e NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 Operation Manual V061 E1 L The screens displayed on the NT31 and NT31C PTs are created with the Support Tool and transferred to the PT This manual describes how to create and transfer screen data
298. rom the stated criteria If there is either improve the surrounding environment so that the values fall within the stated range or adjust the NT31 NT31C for example by re tightening screws Point Inspection Details Criterion Inspection Inspected Instrument Power supply Fluctuation in power supply terminal volt Permissible voltage fluctuation range Tester voltage age 20 4 to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 10 Ambient envi Ambient temperature temperature in the 0 to 50 C Thermometer ronmental con operation panel ditions Ambient humidity humidity in the opera 35 to 85 RH Hygrometer tion panel Presence absence of dust Dust must not be settled Visual inspection Mounting condi Looseness of mounting brackets etc Phillips screwdriver tions Connector connections of connecting To be fully inserted and locked with no Phillips screwdriver cable looseness Looseness of screws in external wiring To be no looseness Phillips screwdriver Conditions of external connecting cables Faults such as incipient disconnection Visual inspection Components Brightness of the backlight Must be sufficiently bright Visual inspection with limited lives Backlight life Brightness is halved after about 50 000 hours of use at high brightness Note 1 Do not disassemble for repairs or modification 2 The disposal of the PT including batteries to be disposed and backlight may be regulated by national or local authorities Disp
299. rrectly Send Receive perform a conductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable For details on communications cables refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port The communications service of the Check that the host is capable of communicating with host is stopped Send Receive the NT31 NT31C confirm that the communications settings of the host and NT31 NT31C match Time out Interval is too short Send Set a longer value for Time out Interval at the host side Time out Interval is too short Set a longer value for Time out Interval in the System Receive Menu 6 9 12 Setting the Time out Interval page 186 It may also be possible to solve the prob lem by shortening the host cycle time PLC Unit No Error The unit does not match that set on Re set the unit number at the host side to 0 the PLC Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the communications conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 NAK received Check the settings for allocated words and bits If noise is a possible factor distance the cable from sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot of noise use a cable with a high degree of protection against noise for the transmission route Also make the cable as short as po
300. rror 98 02 07 09 21 Cycle Time Over 98 02 17 15 44 6 11 6 Checking Screen Data The NT31 NT31C allows the registered screens Nos 1 to 3999 to be dis played and checked by operation from the System Menu Reference e Window screens cannot be displayed by operation from the System Menu e Only the user screens Nos 1 to 3999 can be displayed Screens for sys tem use cannot be displayed Specifying The Display Method Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below Setting Options Display of Lamp Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch ON OFF Touch SW No switch is displayed or not The display format is as follows LLIOONOOOOO LI area type OOOOOOO bit number Display of Memory Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string mem ON OFF Table No ory tables are displayed or not The display format for numeral memory tables is NOOOO and the display format for character string memory tables is SOOOO This function is valid for the following display elements Numeral displays Character string displays Bar graphs Numeral setting input fields including thumbwheel type Character string input fields Display of image Allows designation of whether image library code numbers are displayed or not ON OFF Library No Display of Broken Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are
301. rs when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xiii XIV PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Terminal You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to s
302. s Transmission prohibited Transmission of ID characters Transmission prohibited Bar code types Multi reading all types can be read Trigger switch setting Automatic reading mode About RS CS Control During bar code reading the NT31 NT31C performs RS CS control When the Input Method setting of the NT31 NT31C is set to Auto the RS signal is turned OFF prohibiting the next input until the read data has been sent to the host as notification Because of this when the Auto setting is made the next input is not possible until the data has been sent to the host as notification However when the setting is Auto and the RS CS signals of the cable are shorted RS CS control is ineffective Consequently data input from the bar code reader to the NT31 NT31C is updated regardless of whether or not the data is sent to the host as notification For details refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used The data format for communications when using the bar code input function of the NT31 NT31C is shown below STX ETX 02H 03H The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to 7FH and the maximum data length is 40 bytes Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and discarded 3 5 Using a Memory Unit 36 Reference This section describes how to use of a Memory Unit The function of the Memory Unit is determined by the model of PT being used
303. s the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 179 System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 9 Setting the History Display Method Reference 180 The NT31 NT31C features the display history record function which records the time at which screens are displayed during operation and the number of times they are displayed and the alarm history record function which continu ally monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when bits come ON and the number of times they come ON The Hist Disp Method setting determines whether when these record data are displayed in sort by occurrence the records are displayed in a progres sion from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest e From Old Data The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest e From New Data The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest The default factory setting is From New Data e When the voltage of the NT31 NT31C s built in battery becomes low the history record contents cannot be retained e For details on the display history record function and the alarm history record function refer to 2 15 71 Display History Record
304. s conditions for com Communications munications between the NT31 NT31C and the host Conditions Port Communications Method Communications Type Settings Settingliem Function Setting Options Comm A Method Set the communications method used at serial A system program for OMRON model port A Depending on the communications None Host Link NT Link 1 1 method further communications condition set NT Link 1 N standard or high tings may be necessary speed Bar Code Reader Memory link Comm B Select Set whether serial port B is to be used for RS RS 232C RS 422A 168 232C or RS 422A communications Comm B Method Set the communications method used at serial A system program for OMRON model port B Depending on the communications None Host Link NT Link 1 1 method further communications condition set NT Link 1 N standard or high tings may be necessary speed Memory link Communications Condition Settings for The Host Link Method Setting Page Options Comm Speed Sets the communications speed 9600 bps 161 for host link only for communications with the host 19200 bps Communications Condition Settings for The NT link 1 1 Method No further communications conditions need to be set Communications Conditions Settings for The NT Link 1 N Method Setting Page Options Unit No Set the unit number of the NT31 0 to 7 for NT link 1 N only NTS1C Comm Speed Sets the communicatio
305. s ineffective In order to set the terminal resistance wiring work is required at the cable s connector carry out the wiring correctly by referring to Appendix E Making the Cable 93 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Terminal resistor setting X Pin Nos 9ana 10 Foncion O Shorted Terminal resistance is applied Short only at the NT31 NT31C connected to the end of an RS 422A 485 cable Open Terminal resistance is not applied Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT31 NT31C anywhere other than at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices make sure that the power supply to all of the connected devices NT31 NT31C PLC etc is OFF Reference e The internal circuit of the NT31 NT31C is shown below 10 RDB lt __ 16 RDA Making a connection here inserts a terminator between RDB Terminal resistor 120 Q and RDA 9 TRM _ e For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT ALOO1 E refer to Set tings at the RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT AL001 E page 81 5 2 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port The methods for connecting the RS 422A 485 port of the NT31 NT31C and the RS 422A 485 port of the host are described here There are the following methods The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PLCs By using the memory link m
306. s installed in a CS CJ series CPU Unit 124 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting between NT31 NT31C Units NT31 NT31C Host ooooo0oo0oo0o00000 OOOO o0o0o000Q 13 Connecting an NT31 NT31C and a Host 25 NT31 NT31C side NT31 NT31C side Abbreviation Pin number Pin n a o ro 3 422A 485 connector 422A 485 connector ie 4 a oooo0oo0oo0o000000 OOOOOo0o0o0o0o0o00Q NS EN a AE gt D D z N ol N wo 25 pin type nd 25 pin type Next PT 2 Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31 NT31C at the end of the RS 485 cable marked x in the figure above only For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 The relay terminal block is not included in this figure Insert the relay terminal block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below NT31 NT31C Host Wiring When Connecting a CS series Serial Communications Board CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit C series C2Q0HX HG HE Z E Communications Board or CQM1H Serial Communications Board Applicable Units CS1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 125 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V 1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 6
307. s real time information about the system and equip ment operating status etc Its power of expression is enhanced by graphs and other visuals making the displays easy to understand 98 02 25 Production Control 3 14 15 12 Product Today s target Current production Number defective Number repaired achieved NT31 54 NT31C 62 The NT31 NT31C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the appropriate remedial action is defective Line stopped Check the following 1 Defective pin L3 2 Position of dog M2 3 Mounting of photosensor P5 Setting touch switches on the NT31 NT31C allows workers to use the NT31 NT31C as an operating panel the results of the operations are transmitted to the host Electroplating control ka prv MANERAN ka zus Ciamp J noan OON OON DOWN Aav Electro Corr Int stop rev lyte Wash prv fluid Role and Operation of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 1 1 1 2 Operations of the NT31 NT31C Displays Screens Receives Data from a Host Sends Data to a Host Screen Data The information to be displayed screen data can be created on a computer using the Support Tool and stored in the NT31 NT31C The screen data can be displayed on the NT31 NT31C in response to instructions from the host or touch switch operation The screen data designated by instructions from the host or touch switch operation is displayed
308. s the Abort touch switch The NT31 NT31C will return to the MAIN TENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 177 System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 8 Setting the Screen Saver Start up Time 178 Reference The NT31 NT31C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and the backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time The Screen Saver Start up Time setting determines the time interval before the screen saver function operates The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes The default factory setting is 10 min utes If 000 is set the screen saver function does not operate The screen saver can be canceled and previous screen redisplayed by any of the following operations e Touching any part of the touch panel e Screen switching due to PT status control area operations e Screen switching due to bit memory table operations e Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations e Changing the backlight mode e Screen printing change from OFF to ON e Screen display change from OFF to ON e It is possible to display the character string stored in character string memory table No O at random positions and in random colors while the screen display is off For details refer to 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement page 176 Note however that when this feature is used the backlig
309. specific bits at the host are turned ON and the number of times they are turned ON Trend graph logging function and background function Changes in the contents of numeral memory tables displayed in trend graphs can be recorded logging function Also the record can be maintained even when the trend graph is not displayed background function Mathematical function This function allows calculations to be executed continuously during PT operation when mathematical table has been set in screen data Arithmetic operations bit operations logic operations and comparison operations can be performed Operations with up to 5 terms are possible Functions of the NT31 NT31C Section 1 2 1 2 5 Displays Fixed Displays 10 The NT31 NT31C can display various kinds of elements such as characters numeric values graphs lamps and touch switches on a screen The screen data displayed by the NT31 NT31C are created by using the Support Tool at a personal computer Characters fixed display gt BB Esc Touch switches Machine name NT31C ST143 Characters _ Production qty 137 units character string display Bar graph Numeric values numeral display 0 50 e z gt Lamps Characters and various graphics circles circular arcs sectors polylines polygons and rectangles whose display does not have to be changed and mark data image data and library data that has already been registered can be writte
310. splayed e Undefined command error 239 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 Send Errors The following errors can occur when receiving data e Time out error e Data over flow error Probable Causes and The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in Remedies the table below Displayed Probable Cause Parity Error Framing Error Over run Error Communications parameters Check if the settings at the host for parity bit frame conditions set incorrectly length communications speed stop bit length and flow control agree with those at the NT31 NT31C The connecting cables are not con Check the communications cable connection and nected correctly perform a conductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable For details on communications cables refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the communications conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 FCS Check Sum Error Noise caused data corruption during Carry out grounding work in accordance with the communications conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 The PLC is transmitting incorrect Check the operation at the host side data Time out Error The connecting cables are not con Check the communications cable connection and nected co
311. ssible Undefined Command Error The host is not supported Check the PLC model used for the host Instruction level 3 is not effective Check that the instruction level setting for the host is level 1 2 3 240 Maintenance of the NT31 NT31C Section 7 3 Error Details Displayed Probable Cause Data Over Flow Error Communications command from the Set flow control method in the host host is too long With memory link Increase transmission interval Command transmission to the host is Check the communications cable not possible Check the control method at the PT and the host Increase the communications on speed when it to slow 7 3 Maintenance of the NT31 NT31C Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT31 NT31C is always used in its optimum condition N WARNING Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied Doing either of these may result in electrical shock Spare PT It is advisable to have a spare NT31 NT31C available to minimize system downtime in the event of an NT31 NT31C failure or if the screen display becomes difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit Backlight When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read easily replace the backlight The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the NT31 ST121L EV2 NT31C ST141LJ EV2 while it is mounted in an operation panel The ba
312. stablished perform the appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu If necessary initialize the memory of the NT31 NT31C by operation from the System Menu Connect the Support Tool to the NT31 NT31C and transmit the screen data from the Support Tool to the NT31 NT31C For details on connecting the Support Tool refer to 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool page 33 Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT31 NT31C for example the conditions for communications with the host using the mem ory switches Connect the NT31 NT31C to the host and start operation If an error occurs during operation check the I Os settings etc by referring to this guide 6 2 Starting the NT31 NT31C 6 2 1 Initial Processing Y After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly switch on the power to the NT31 NT31C to start it up This section describes the operation of the NT31 NT31C when it is started up Operation at Startup The NT31 NT31C operates as follows when the power is switched ON or when it is reset Self diagnosis including a check on the internal memory of the NT31 NT31C and a system program check and the internal processing required for startup are performed If an error occurs during initial processing an error screen is displayed lf there is an error in the system program the system program must be re installed For details on the installation proc
313. system program to PT screen data area e For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors refer to Errors When Using a Memory Unit page 43 In this mode system program or the screen data in the NT31 NT31C is forc ibly written to the Memory Unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT31 NT31C This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch opera tion is not possible or if Someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the operation site is using the system When screen data is written to the Memory Unit the data that has been stored in the specified area up until that point is lost if the data is written into only one Bank the other Bank will not be affected Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT31 NT31C to the Memory Unit by automatic transmission 1 Check that the power supply to the NT31 NT31C is OFF then set the DIP switches of the Memory Unit as follows after installing Memory Unit to NT31 NT31C SW2 4 ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously OFF System Screen not transmitted simultaneously SW2 3 ON Bank 1 OFF Bank 0O SW1 4 ON System program OFF Screen data It is not strictly necessary to set SW2 1 to OFF to disable writing to the PT but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors e Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously dis ables the setting
314. t I O Check Select I F Check I F Check Device Check a Select Comm Port A or Comm Port B The check screen is displayed Check on screen page 215 After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT31 NT31C returns to the I F CHECK MENU screen 217 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Checking Check communications with a printer by following the menu operation from Communications with a the System Menu shown below Printer Ver 4 12 Select Maintenance Mode Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU 170 Settings Sereen Data Diep Select I O Check I I F Check Select I F Check Device Check Select Printer Printer LIZA CHECK MENU Confirm that a printer is connected to the J NT31 NT31C then press Execute Connect to printer and execute Printer Interface Check will be printed out at the printer e While data is being sent to the printer the message Checking Now is displayed 218 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 e When the sending of data to the printer is completed Finished Normal by Printer Interface Check is displayed e If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts the message Finished Printer output failed is displayed After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT31 NT31C returns to the I F CHECK MENU screen 6 12 Programming Console Func
315. t is installed in a CS CJ series CPU Unit Connecting between The relay terminal block is not included in this figure Insert the relay terminal NT31 NT31C Units block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below NT31 NT31C Host RS 422A NT31 NT31C side NT31 NT31C side Shielding wire so 2 ro ooooo0oo0o000000 OOOO o0o0o0o000Q ooooo0oo0oo000000 OOOWDOOOOO0O0GQ X 13 25 25 pin type 25 pin type 2 Make the connection between pin numbers 9 and 10 at the NT31 NT31C at the end of the RS 422A cable marked x in the figure above only For details on handling shield wires refer to 5 2 8 Handling the Shield on RS 422A 485 Cables on page 128 Connecting an NT31 NT31C and a Host NT31 NT31C Host RS 422A 122 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Wiring When Connecting a CS series Serial Communications Board CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit C series C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board or CQM1H Serial Communications Board Applicable Units CS1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU31 V1 CJ1W SCU41 V1 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V 1 CS1G CPU42H 43H 44H 45H CS1H CPU63H 64H 65H 66H 67H CS1D CPU65H 67H See note C200HE CPU32 42 Z E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 Z E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE 85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 61 A Serial Communications Board cannot be used NT31 NT31C side RS 232C
316. t link mode Communications conditions set by the contents of DM DM6651 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communica tions speed 19200 bps DM6653 0000 Unit 00 Connecting to a CPM2C The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS CJ series PLCs The CPM2C s communications port handles both RS 232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally Therefore when using the CPM2C it is necessary to select RS 232C or peripheral port con nections according to the kind of cable and port on the cable used as shown in the following table Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details Port connecting to PT PLC Setup RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CPM2C CN111 Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CPM2C CN111 Peripheral port settings RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CS1W CN118 Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CS1W CN114 Peripheral port settings Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Peripheral port CPM2C CN111 CPM2C csiw cni1g CPM2C csiw cn114 CPM2C a RS 232C port Peripheral port RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin female D Sub 9 pin female Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 or CQM1H When using a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 or CQM1H the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make t
317. tem Menu shown below The communications speed determines whether the 1 N NT Link is standard or high speed Standard Standard 1 N NT Link High speed High speed 1 N NT Link Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU J Ver 4 12 Select Memory Switch ay SUL ICH Display the fourth memory switch screen by Start up pressing the J next screen or T previous BAA asec screen touch switch Key Press Sound ON Printer ESO Print Method Tone MAINTENANCE MODE MENU lt MEMORY SWITCH gt _ j Press the touch switch corresponding to the 4 4 port at which the NT link 1 N method standard or high speed is to be set Comm Comm A Method Host Link A Method or Comm B Method to display the setting option NT Link 1 N The setting option changes each time the e touch switch is pressed In this example Comm B Select RS 232C Comm B Method None serial port A is used Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 Press the Set touch switch to the right of Quit l the port at which the setting has been made ln this example serial port A is used NT Link 1 N RS 2320 None Press the Unit No touch switch to display the unit number to be set Press the Comm Speed touch switch to display the communications speed standard or 115 2 kbps high speed The Comm Speed setting determines which method of 1 N NT Link is used The setting option changes
318. th the CS1G CS1H the Programming Console function cannot be used simultaneously at both the built in RS 232C port and peripheral port Reference When an error screen is displayed the system menu can be displayed by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously The Check touch switch on the screen can also be used to display the system menu but it will not work unless the cause of the error has been removed If the system menu is not displayed when the Check touch switch is pressed press two of the four corners of the touch panel to return to the system menu 222 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 Key Operations Mode Selection Keys Mode Lock Ke The display element on the Programming Console screen shown below com prises the mode selection keys which change the operation mode of the PLC and the mode lock key which prevents unintended mode changes MUNI TOR RIL IN PROGRAM Mode selection keys s Ni Mode lock key The RUN MONITOR and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch switches and pressing them causes the PLC operation mode to change unlike an actual Programming Console it is possible to switch directly between the RUN mode and the PROGRAM mode When the Programming Console function is started the PLC operation status is read and reflected at the PLC The mode lock key element is also a touch switch and it alternates between the lock ON with no key displayed and lock OFF with
319. the Host Section 4 1 e Unit SW1 SW2 Set these switches to 0 e Instruction level parity and transfer code SW4 Set this switch to 2 e Communications speed SW3 Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps Setting the Rear Switches e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP switch Set 3 to ON CTS selector switch External e CTS selection selector switch 0 V ON Set this always to 0 V ON C1000H F C2000H Rack mounting Unit 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Setting the Front Switches Local Host Mode control key switch Set this to host link 49 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Setting the Rear Switches I O port RS 422A RS 232C Synchronization Internal NOUO ARAR O0OAONOO External I e O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C e Unit DIP SW1 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Q Terminator Fy ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 A CTS oV External e Synchronization selector switch Set this to Internal e Communications speed DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 0010 to select 19 200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled 50 e
320. the PLC side _Whenusing host link or NT link 1 1 When there is 5 V output at the PLC side When using NT link 1 N e When using the host link or NT link 1 1 method short the RS and CS terminals at the PLC side with each other leave the RS and CS terminals at the NT ALOO1 side open e When using the NT link 1 N cross connect the RS and CS terminals at the NT ALOO1 and PLC sides If there is 5 V output at the PLC side no external power supply is required for the NT ALOO1 85 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Wiring for a Memory Link Connection Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below NT ALOO1 side Host side Abbreviation Connector nooq Abbroviaton Poa RD CS RS 232C connector RS 232C connector 9 pin type Shielding wire No 5 V output is at the host side A 5V output is present at the host side Since it is necessary to input a voltage of 5 V to the number 6 pin of NT AL001 supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply for NT ALOO1 is required 5 1 3 1 N Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the Host The connection method in which the RS 422A 485 ports of multiple NT31 NT31Cs are connected to the RS 232C port of one host in a 1 N connection is described here An RS 232C RS 422A Adapter NT ALOO1 is used to convert between the RS 232C and RS 422A 485 communicati
321. the PT refer to section 4 When RS 422A 485 used at the PT refer to section 5 Confirm the settings and Create the host program check communications Start operation A System program installation is only done in special circumstances for example when changing the system program or to recover the original status of the installed program This operation is not normally necessary When using other PLC models sequencers however it is necessary to install specific system programs L Display of the system menu and all change operations can be inhibited This enables you to prevent the accidental deletion or alteration of screens and settings Reference e For the system program use the NT31 NT31C system program supplied as an accessory with the NT series Support Tool NT ZJCAT1 EV4 e For the Support Tool use NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 L 21 Before Operating Section 1 6 Refer to the following manuals for the devices and software NT631C NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 L Operation Manual VO61 E1 05 E1 05 NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 L1 Operation Manual PLC SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual CPM2A SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual Manual SYSMAC CPM1 CPM1A CAM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 W353 E1 L Programmable Controllers rE ogra nming Manual SYSMAC C200H opetalon Manual Eas pecan W235 E1 0 wa02 E 1 0 W963 E 1 0 L SYSMAC CVM1 CV500 CV1000 CV2000 Opera
322. the touch panel adjustment Automatic turn Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes or to remain on off function Indicators POWER Lit while power is being supplied Lit in green Running normally Memory Unit automatic transmission done Flash in green Memory Unit automatic transmission being executed Memory Unit auto matic transmission error Lit in orange Low battery voltage during operation Flash in red Low battery voltage when NT31 NT31C is stopped Note Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity Version 2 V2 PTs 25 000 hours min at medium brightness 10 000 hours min at high brightness 248 Specifications Appendix A Panel Specifications iem Specification Touch panel Type Resistive type Number of switches 192 16 horizontally x 12 vertically Maximum number that can be registered on one screen 192 Cell size NT31 NT31C 6 3 x 6 3 mm Input Pressure sensitive type Operating force 1 N minimum Life expectancy One million operations minimum External Interface Specifications pte Specification S O Serial communications Serial port A Conforms to EIA RS 232C D SUB 9 pin connector female 5 V 250 mA max output at pin No 6 Serial port B EIA RS 232C or RS 422A 485 selectable by memory switch setting D SUB 25 pin connector female Parallel interface Conforms to Centronics standard 20 pin half pitch connector Expansion interface
323. tible PT type for the system program inside the Memory Unit The second line System program name and Version for the system pro gram inside the Memory Unit The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some models e In the case of screen data The comment for the screen data in the NT31 NT31C is displayed here The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings of the origin of transmitting as described in the table below Destination PT screen PT system Memory unit Bank 0 _ gt Memory unit Bank 1 PT system screen Memory Unit Bank 0 1 fixed Memory Unit Bank 0 e f system program is selected Memory Unit Bank 1 PT system fixed e f screen data is selected PT screen fixed Memory Unit Bank 0 1 PT system screen fixed e When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously from the PT to the Memory Unit the setting of banks is Bank 0 system program Bank 1 screen data and when transmitting them from the Memory Unit to the PT either of the following combinations must be used Bank 0 system program Bank 1 other than system program Bank 0 other than system program Bank 1 system program Using a Memory Unit Errors When Using a Memory Unit System Program in the PT and Memory Unit for Each PT Mod Section 3 5 e When writing the system program into the NT31 NT31C the type of sys tem program inside
324. ting resistance enabled 111 112 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Port 1 RS 232C Terminal resistance setting switch TER Set to ON Terminal resistance is present right side Two wire type four wire type changeover switch WIRE For RS 422A 4 4 wire type right side For RS 485 2 2 wire type left side Port 2 RS 422A 485 Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU Unit After settings are written they become effective by turning the power ON restarting the Unit restarting the communications port or exe cuting the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown Allocated DM Setting Contents Area words DM32010 8200 1 N NT Link Mode DM32011 0000 to 0009 1 Baud rate standard OO00L The highest unit number of the connected PTs 0 to 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 hex for the baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 hex For example when connecting PTs with model numbers 3 4 5 and 6 to port 2 in the NT link 1 N set a value of 8200 Hex for D32010 0000 Hex for DM32011 and 0006 Hex for D32016 Connecting to a
325. tion The NT31 NT31C has been equipped with the Programming Console func tion which allows it to be used like a C2Q00H PRO27 E Programming Console for CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E CS CU series or SRM1 PLCs Except for recording saving ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying reading them almost all the functions of a Programming Console can be executed Note When the programmable controller functions are used carefully check that the system is safe before carrying out the following operations e Changing monitor data e Switching the operating mode e Forced set or reset e Changing a present value or set value 219 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 6 12 1 Usable Systems The Programming Console function can communicate with the PLC with the communications methods indicated in the following table Communi Communi Applicable PLCs Connected cations cations Port Method Type NT Link 1 1 RS 232C C200HE CPU42 Z E CPU Unit s x built in RS C200HG CPU43 63 Z E 232C port C200HX CPU44 64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CPM2A 30cD00 0O 1 CPM2A 40cD00 0O 1 CPM2A 60cD00 0O 1 CPM2C 10000000 g0 2 cPM2c 20 000000 0 2 CQM1 CPU40 EV1 CQM1H CPU21 51 61 SRM1 C02 V2 CPM1 10CDR Peripheral port CPM1 20CDR 3 CPM1A 10CD CPM1A 20CD CPM1A 30CD CPM1A 40CD Pi T CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E v1 e CPU Unit s CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 1 Be a l CSJG CPU
326. tion Manual Ladder Dia W202 E1 grams SYSMAC CS Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 E1 L SYSMAC CJ Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W393 E1 L SYSMAC CS Series CJ Series NSJ Series Programmable Controllers W394 E1 L Programming Manual SYSMAC CS Series CJ Series NSJ Series Programmable Controllers W340 E1 L Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series Programming Consoles Operation Manual W341 E1 L SYSMAC CS CJ CP Series NSJ Series Communications Commands W342 E1 L Reference Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series Serial Communications Boards W336 E1 L Serial Communications Units Operation Manual SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation Manual W365 E1 L CompoBus Master SRM1 Operation Manual W318 E1 L Control Unit Programming SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual C series PLCs SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual C series PLCs Software Operation Manual C series PLCs W248 E1 0 E1 Devices SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual CVM1 PLCs weni E1 0 SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide W332 E1 L W333 E1 L CX Programmer Operation Manual W446 E1 L Host Link Unit SYSMAC C series Host Link Unit Operation Manual W143 E1 L Serial Communica sySMAC CVM1 CV series Host Link Operation Manual W205 E1 0 tions Board SYSMAC C200HW COM01 C200HW COMO02 V1 to C2ZOOHW COMOG6 EV1 W304 E1 L Serial Communications Board Operation Manual 22 SE
327. tor function which can be used to change the PLC s operating mode read change words in the PLC s data areas and display the PLC s error log of a CS CJ series PLC CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E or SRM 1 The Device Monitor can perform the following operations e Changing the PLC s operating mode e Displaying changing the contents of words displaying changing the status of bits force setting force resetting the status of bits Registration Moni tor e Listing the contents of a range of words Continuous Monitor e Displaying the error log and clearing errors Error Log This section provides an overview of the Device Monitor function and explains how to connect to the PLC For more details refer to 2 16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual Be sure that it is safe to proceed before using the Device Monitor function to perform one of the following operations from the PT Changing monitored data Switching the PLC s operating mode Force setting or force resetting bits Changing PVs or SVs e The Device Monitor function can be used with Ver 3 0 and higher ver sions of the PT system program only e The Device Monitor functions are almost identical to the functions of the Data Access Console DAC e The Device Monitor function cannot be used with host link or memory link communications 225 Device Monitor Function Section 6 13 6 13 1 Compatible Systems The following table shows th
328. ube to shrink it in place nO Heat shrink tube Hood Assembly Assemble the connector hood as shown below Aluminum foil tape End connected to FG End not connected to FG 268 Appendix F Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool Assembly of Connecting Cables Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways depending on the type of RS 232C connector 25 pin Connector Personal computer Connector for peripheral devices on PT Connector hood Connector hood Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and the periph eral device connector on the PT Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable ee e a e a a aa 9 pin Connector SD RD Personal computer Connector for peripheral devices on PT CS SG SG Shielding wire Connector hood Connector hood Note Please connect the shielding wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and the periph eral device connector on the PT Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable Connector XM2D 0901 9 pin made by OMRON for personal computer XM2A 0901 9 pin made by OMRON for PT Connector hood XM2S 0911 9 pin mm pitch screw made by OMRON XM2S 0913 9 pin inch pitch screw made by OMRON Cable AWG28x5P IFVV SB Multi co
329. unction is enabled only through RUN mode of NT31 NT31C In System Menu or System Installer mode this function is not started 176 System Settings Section 6 9 Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU Memory Init Memory Switch Alarm History 170 Settings Sereen Data Diep Calendar Check 41 Press J next screen or T previous Qui a screen to display the second memory Wait Time asec switch setting screen Select Memory Switch Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF er Controller ESC P Print Method Tone lt MEMORY SWI TCH gt 1 4 Press Screen Saver Movement to display Quit lt Display or Display erased Movement Display erased The setting option changes each time the PAE ee touch switch is pressed Start up Time Amin No Movemnet Hist Disp Methodi From New Data Resume Function OFF To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT31 NT31C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings pres
330. unications port or execu tion of the STUP command In the following table the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area and settings are shown Allocated DM Area Setting Contents words N1 N NT Link Mode Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Allocated DM Area Setting Contents words When using the Memory Link Method DM32011 000A Baud rate high speed The highest unit number of the connected PTs 0 to 7 For example when connecting PTs with model numbers 3 4 5 and 6 to port 2 set the value 8200 hex to DM32010 OOOA hex to DM32011 and 0006 hex to DM32016 Connecting to a CS CJ series Serial Communications Board CS CJ series Rack mounting Units CS1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 and port 2 are both RS 422A 485 ports CJ1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 and port 2 are both RS 422A 485 ports CJ1W SCU41 V1 Port 1 is an RS 422A 485 port Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit using the rotary switches on the front of the Unit Set the number or symbol in the setting dis play window in the following way using a flat blade screwdriver When using a CS CJ series Serial Communications Unit set the switches as shown below 2 wire or 4 wire selector WIRE 4 wire RS 422A or 2 wire RS 485 Terminating resistance switch TERM ON terminator ON terminating resistance enabled CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings Setting is written from the Programmi
331. ure described below a Disengage the connector 242 Maintenance of the NT31 NT31C b Section 7 3 Sufficiently loosen the screw that secures the CFL unit The screw is designed so that it cannot be removed but if it does come out for some reason and falls inside the PT it must be extricated with out fail Shift the CFL unit to the right Pull out the CFL unit 5 Fita new CFL unit by following the procedure described below a Slot the projection on the left end of the CFL unit into the hole in the fixture inside the PT Engage the CFL unit with the fixture inside the PT Check that the CFL unit is in contact with the left end of the fixture and is parallel with the fixture during this engagement Tighten the screw of the CFL unit to secure it The tightening torque is 0 2 N m Engage the connector of the CFL unit with the connector of the PT so that the red cable is at the left side Insert the connector so that it clicks firmly into place ri Red cable White cable Fixture inside the NT31 ST121LJ EV2 NT31C ST 141L EV2 6 Fit the cover and secure it with the screw 7 Reconnect the wiring cables and units disconnected in 2 and tighten the screws 8 Before starting normal operation confirm that the following tests can be executed correctly by using the I O check in the Maintenance menu Also perform a communications test with the host e Touch switch e Backlight 9 On confir
332. use the recommended connectors connector hoods and cables indicated in the table below Some Units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood Check the required components and prepare them in advance Name Model Remarks Delivered with Connector XM2A 0901 9 pin CS series CS1G CS1H Made by OMRON CS1D CJ series CJ1G CJ1H CJ1M C series CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPU Units CV500 LK201 XM24 2501 25 pin C500 LK203 Made by OMRON CV500 LK201 C200H LK201 EV1 DB 25P 25 pin 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Made by JAE 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 73 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 74 Note Note Name Model Remarks Delivered with Connector XM2S 0911 9 pin C series CQM1 C200HS hood Made by OMRON C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPU Units CV500 LK201 XM2S 0913 9 pin Made by OMRON XM2S 0911 E 9 pin CS series CS1G CS1H Made by OMRON CS1D CJ series CJ1G CJ1H CJ1M XM2S 2511 25 pin C500 LK203 Made by OMRON CV500 LK201 C200H LK201 EV1 DB C2 J9 25 pin 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 pee ismu gcansaovevt AWG28x5P Multi core shielded cable IFVV SB arena T CO MA VV SB Multi core shielded cable 5Px28AWG Made by Hitachi Cable Ltd After connecting a communications cable always secure it with the screws OMRON Cables with Connectors When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link method OMRON cables with connectors shown below are av
333. vides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs types of con nection communications methods etc This information will enable you to understand the applications of the PTs Section 2 describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs and the functions of the parts of PTs as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices Section 3 describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices Section 4 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 232C port of the PT Section 5 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 422A 485 port of the PT Section 6 describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start the PT Functions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also explained here Section 7 describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors The Appendices provide specifications dimensions procedures for using an RS 232C RS 422A Adapter procedures for transporting and storing the PT information on cable preparation information on the relationship between the system program and hardware and product lists N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the p
334. w PLC Series CPU Units with Built in RS 422A NT Link Model Name 1 1 Function C series C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HE C200HE CPU42 Z E Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200HG Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E C200HX C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CV series 2 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 1 One of the following Communications Boards is required C200HW COMO03 EV1 or C200HW COMO06 EV1 2 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required 3 CPU Units of CVM1 CV series PLCs without the suffix EVO cannot be connected 107 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 108 The NT link 1 1 method cannot be used using RS 485 To use the NT link 1 1 method connect by RS 422A NT link connection using RS 422A 485 is not possible with CPM1 Settings at the Host The setting methods for each type of Unit are described in the following e Connecting to a CVM1 CV series EVL CPU Units e CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 e CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 PLC Setup When connecting to the CVM1 CV series CPU Unit by the NT link 1 1 method no particular settings are required at the PLC Setup Setting the Front Switches e Host link communications method selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A
335. x Combining a EV1 Version and Version without a EV Suffix System program Ver 1 0L System program Ver 2 0L or Ver 2 1L The following functions cannot be used e Analogue meter e High definition font display e Installation of system programs using Memory Unit e Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs e Memory link e Window control from the host e Multiple display of window screens e Moving a window e Refer to the following table for details on new functions supported by the V2 ver sions The following functions cannot be used e Installation of system programs using Memory Unit e High definition font display e Refer to the following table for details on new functions supported by the V2 ver sions Hardware NT31 ST1211 E NT31C ST14111 E NT31 ST121L EV1 NT31C ST141L EV1 The following functions cannot be used e Analogue meter e High definition font display e Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs e Memory link e Window control from the host e Multiple display of window screens e Moving a window e Refer to the following table for details on new functions supported by the V2 ver sions Installation of system programs using Memory Unit is possible The new functions supported by the V2 versions cannot be used Refer to the fol lowing table for details The system program s version can be checked from the System Menu Combining a EV1 Version and EV2 Version System program Ver 2 0L or
336. xactly the same as for the NT Link 1 1 Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC When using the Programming Console function with a CQM1H turn ON pin 7 of the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H s CPU Unit The connection method is the same as for the NT Link 1 1 With a CPM1 connect the RS 232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SEC TION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on con necting to the PLC The connection method is the same as for the NT Link 1 1 Connect to the PLC s communications connector with a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SEC TION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on con necting to the PLC When using the Programming Console function with a CPM2C turn ON pin 2 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C s CPU Unit The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link 1 N standard or high speed Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connect
337. y Switches e The power was switched OFF Initialize the screen data memory by oper during screen data initialization ation at the System Menu then re transmit checking or transmission the screen data 6 4 1 Clearing Screen e Transmission of screen data was Data page 140 interrupted If the problem persists contact your e Illegal data has been written to OMRON service center the screen data memory No screen data is registered Transmit screen data from the Support Tool Allocated words have not been set Allocate words for the PT status control for the PT status control area and area and PT status notify area with the PT status notify area Support Tool and then transmit the direct connection information to the NT31 NT31C The type of registered screen data Initialize the screen data memory then does not match that at the NT31 transmit the correct screen data 6 4 1 NT31C Clearing Screen Data page 140 235 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 No Starting Screen Specified Starting Screen is not saved Fix Screen Data using by the Support Tool Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT MODE and download Screen Data again Touch Panel is disconnected Memory Switch Corrupted Because Memory Switch setting was last Initialized Memory Switch setting Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM MENU Calendar Data Error Calendar Data is incorrect Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE
338. y following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MODE MENU wit PT Settings Henory Init Display Hisory temory Switch Alarm History 1 0 Settings Screen Data Disp Select Memory Init Select Alarm History Display History Alarm History Memory Table Select Yes initialize lan Histon The alarm history record data is initialized During initialization the message Initializing is displayed If No is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the alarm history record data On completion of alarm history record data initialization the message Fin ished is displayed and the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 145 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 6 4 4 Initializing the Recipe Tables You can initialize the recipe tables i e all the recipe data edited in the NT31 NT31C Here initializing the recipe tables means to restore the battery backup memory recipe data memory to the values in flash memory at that time If after downloading from the Support Tool you do not upload the data even once initialization will restore the initial values set using the Support Tool The values will not be cleared Initialize the recipe tables by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode
339. yed Since this indicates that there is a communications fault check the communica tions cables and settings 215 System Maintenance Section 6 11 For NT Link 1 1 or 1 N Example Serial port B while using the NT Link 1 N lt Comm Port B gt Check the setting of memory SW and the LC and connect the PT to the PLC with the Comm Port B sending Data ER ORR ORK GRR GRR KK KK KK KK ORK KK KK ORR AR ORK ORK RK GRR ORR KK GRR ORR ORK KK KK KK Received Data ER ORK ORK KK GRR KK KK GRR ORR ORK KK KK ORR ER ORK ORK RK GRR ORR KE GRR ORR ORK RK RR ORR Press Execute to start the check The data for checking communications is sent to the host and is displayed as symbols at Sending Data e If communications with the host are normal the reply from the host is dis played at Received Data as symbols e f a communications error occurs while checking the communications con ditions with the host a communications error screen is displayed Since this indicates that there is a communications fault check the communica tions cables and settings For Memory Link Example Serial port A while using the memory link lt Comm Port A gt heck the setting of memory SW and the ost and connect the PT to the host with the Comm Port Received Data FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FE FF FF FF FF FF FF

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"